\*dOi^- 
 
 <^% 
 
 jfyrxpfQ 
 
 . 
 
 Jfyttfjfld 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 i 
 
 CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 f 
 
 m 
 m 
 
 BY THE REV. ROBERT MORRISON. 
 
 g>erampore : 
 
 PRINTED AT THE MIMIOK-PRCK. 
 1815. 
 
U0"7 ; 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 THE object cfthe following work is, to afford practical assistance to the student 
 of Chinese. All theoretical disquisition respecting the nature of the language has 
 been purposely, omitted. On this subject much has already been said ; but, as jet, 
 in our language, little practical assistance has been afforded to the student. It is 
 hoped that this grammar will, in some degree, supply the defect. And, as it is the 
 first work of the kind in English, and treats of a language lhtle known to Europe- 
 ans, it will, with the judicious, meet with every suitable allowance. 
 
 The writer strongly recommends it to the student to pay particular attention to the 
 Chinese character ; and not to consider that he knows any phrase, till he cau write, 
 without reference, every character contained in it. If this be attended to at first, it 
 will render his future progress more easy, more pleasant, and in the writer's opinion 
 more rapid, than if he confined himself merely f/> thenronunciation of words. 
 
 The Chinese occasionally practise writing with a pencil and water on a flat tile. 
 The water dries up almost instantly, and they form the Character again and again 
 till perfect. The student will find this mode of practising writing extremely useful, 
 and thus forming the character repeatedly, the best method ot committing it to memory. 
 
 The acquisiton of the Chinese language has often been represented as almost 
 impracticable : and sometimes, on the other hand, it has been said to be very easy. 
 It is of importance that the student should take the middle path, where indeed the 
 truth lies. To know something of the Chinese language is a very easy thing;- to 
 know as much of it as will answer main useful and important purposes is not extreme- 
 ]y difficult; — but to be master of the Chine-e language, a point to which the writer 
 has yet to look forward, he considers extremely d fficult. However the difficulty is 
 not insuperable. It is "a liifliculty wl.ich" (in the words of Sir William Jones, "lieu 
 
speaking of the Persian language) "like all others in the world, will be insensibly 
 surmounted by the habit of industry and perseverance, without which no great de- 
 sign was ever accomplished." 
 
 The student therefore should not undertake Chinese under the idea that it is a 
 very easy thing to acquire : nor should he be discouraged from attempting it under 
 an impression that the difficulty of acquiring it is next to insurmountable. 
 
 Should this attempt meetwith a favorable reception, it is intended to be succeeded 
 by Dialogues, Chinese and English ; with Miscellaneous Translations, calculated to 
 facilitate the progress of the student. Also by a Dictionary of the Chinese Lan- 
 guage in two Parts. The first, Chinese and English; the second, English and Chi- 
 nes*. 
 
 Macao, April 2</, 1811. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Remarks on the peculiaritiesof (he Chinese language 1 
 
 Chinese method of giving the pronunciation of Characters, 2 
 
 European Orthography of Chinese words, . 3 
 
 Table of Chinese Syllables, 6—18 
 
 Of the Tones 19—21 
 
 Table by which to practise the Tones, 22—24 
 
 Of the Chinese Characters 25-27 
 
 Table of Radicals, 28— 33 
 
 Of Dictionaries of the Chinese Language 33—36 
 
 Punctuation, ... 80 
 
 Of Nouns 37 
 
 Table of Numerals, , 38 — 59 
 
 Of the Particle chay post-fixed to Nouns, . 59 
 
 Of Number, . . 60—62 
 
 Of Case 62—66 
 
 Of Gender, . . 66—67 
 
 Of Adjectives, Positive Degree, . 68—69 
 
 Comparative, 69 — 77 
 
 Superlative, 77—81 
 
 Of Numbers, ... ... 81—80 
 
 OfPronouns, — Personal, 87—94 
 
 Possessive, 94—101 
 
 Interrogative, 102—103 
 
 ■ Demonstrative, J 04 — 105 
 
 Relative, 106—108 
 
 Distributive, 1011— 109 
 
 Indefinite, 110—112 
 
VI CONTENTS. 
 
 Of Verbs: The Verb" to Lave," 1J3— 143 
 
 The Verb " to be," . 144—171 
 
 "Do; must; ought; should; may ; can ; will; let." . . 171 — 180 
 
 "To advise," 181—197 
 
 . Of the verbs " to increase," and " to strike," as Auxiliaries, . 197 — 198 
 
 Of Impersonal verbs, . . ' . 198—200 
 
 Of Adverbs 201—230 
 
 Of Prepositions, .... 231 — 248 
 
 Of Conjunctions, „ . '. 247—250 
 
 Of Interjections 257—258 
 
 Of the Provincial Dialect, . . . . • . . . 259— CC7 
 
 Of Syntax, 200—272 
 
 Of Prosody 273—280 
 
E R R A T A. 
 
 Page 17, line 8, for 'Cuon,' read ' Cuon.' 
 
 19, — 5, for •lea; read 'Art?.' 
 
 20, — 6, and elsewhere, for 'hid,' 
 
 read '/mi.' 
 
 35, — 9, for 'lit,' read 'Hi.' 
 
 44, — 5, for ' chuhtg,' read ' chu'en.' 
 
 49, — 8, for 'kitten,' read '/eaten.' 
 
 51, — 2,.dcle (n). 
 
 55, — 1G, and elsewhere, for 'ting,' 
 
 read ' tang.' 
 
 51), — In the note for ' (1),* read « (2),' 
 
 and for *(2\' read '(!).' 
 ■ 07, — 13, for ' kicdn,' read 'pe?.' 
 14, for 'pet!,' read ' ku an.' 
 
 73, — 2, for ' nieung,' read ' heung.' 
 
 81, — 10, after * the extreme,' read 
 
 (1 , and after 'of,' rea.l (2). 
 
 00, lines «, 9, 13, for • Ya,' read ' A.' 
 
 91, line 5, for ' xf,' read ' ah •.' 
 
 93, last line, after 'old,' dele the 
 
 comma. 
 
 04, line 5, for'&c.' — read '&.' 
 
 00, — 11, after 'j/iy,' (Ule (3;. 
 
 102, lilies 2, 4, mid p. 103, I. I!) for 
 
 •#iy,' read ' thay.' 
 
 105, line 5, for 'cup,' read 'cups.' 
 
 120, — I, for 'not,' read 'nol.*' 
 
 Page 121, line 3, after 'Uaou,' read '(exple- 
 tive to round the sentence.)' 
 
 122, — 18, for 'tsao,' read 'tiacii.' 
 
 131, — 10, for 'hae,' read ' kae.' 
 
 1G4, — 12, after ' time,' dele the 
 
 semicolon. 
 
 165, — 0, before 'Emperor,' read ' the.' 
 
 1C7, — 4, aftci (discourse,) place a note 
 
 of interrogation. 
 
 179, — 11, for 'keabw,' read ' kcaou.' 
 
 180, — 0, after ' him,' dele *&c.' 
 
 194, — 7, after ' advised,' read '&c.' 
 
 204, — 14, for ' aou,' read * Taou.' 
 
 200, last line, for ' respected,' read ' res- 
 tricted.' 
 
 213, line 12, for * came,' read 'come.' 
 
 227, — I, after ' one,' place a note of 
 
 interrogation. 
 
 231, — 11, for 'of hot,' read 'hot.' 
 
 233, — G, for ' pwiin,' read ' pwtin.' 
 
 230, — 5, for ' Wang,' read ' Heangi 
 
 210, — 11, for 'situation,' read 'situ- 
 ated.' 
 
 243, — 2, for the * Tartars,' read 'the 
 
 Tartar.' 
 259, — 17, for 'languages,' read < lan- 
 guage.' 
 2"0, — 5, for 'day,' read ' day's.' 
 
A GRAMMAR 
 
 CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 
 
 IN learning any language, ancient or modern, Chinese excepted, we 
 build on the foundation that was laid in childhood. — We then acquired the 
 knowledge of a few characters, the signs of simple sounds. To be able to 
 combine these with readiness; to articulate a number of them joined toge- 
 ther, on first seeing them ; and to remember their various combinations, was 
 the result of very considerable labour. In learning every alphabetic lan- 
 guage we proceed on the same plan, and daily, though we may not advert 
 to it, experience the advantage of our previous attainments. But in attempt- 
 ing the Chinese language we have to enter on an intirely new method. 
 They have no alphabet. The character presents nothing to the eye by 
 which its pronunciation can be ascertained. It attempts to communicate 
 to the meaning, regardless of the sound. How far it succeeds, and whe- 
 ther this advantage, if really possessed, equals or overbajances the obvious 
 defect of not conveying the sound, must be determined by those who are 
 masters of Chinese as well as of an alphabetic language, and so able to make 
 a fair comparison. 
 
 Though they have no alphabet, nor any thing in the character itself by 
 
2 AGRAMMAROFTHE 
 
 which its pronunciation can be known, tliey yet endeavour, and succeed 
 imperfectly, to communicate the pronunciation of words. Thus, fust, 
 
 by giving a diameter in common use, and which is supposed to have been 
 learned from the mouth of a master, of the same sound as a character less 
 common. This thev call the ^j yin ; and, second, by the use of two charac- 
 ters which they call the ^ ~tff tsii yin or "divided sound." Thus at ting 
 and kea the initial of the first and final of the last — they spell Ta. And would 
 '" put it down thus: 
 
 Tin Z /£ Tin S\ ~k ( U,e "or* t° »« spelled) 
 
 Kea $m Kea J " TsZ& ±$r divided 
 
 Yin =g tound 
 
 If they confined themselves to just as many initials and finals as are neces- 
 sary, these might soon be acquired, but they use in their Dictionaries and 
 \ Commentaries (where they give the pronunciation as above) a great many 
 different characters for the same initial or final, so that a considerable know, 
 ledge of the character is requisite before they in or (see ym, can be of any 
 use to a learner. At present I shall advert to that orthography of their 
 
 ■words which is adopted in the following work. 
 
 It is proper to premise that their words consist but of one syllable, and 
 those syllables distinguishable by our alphabet are not more in number than 
 about three hundred and fifty. Hence, it is easy to perceive, that whatever 
 orthography be adopted, it will be no difficult matter to make it familiar. 
 
 The different Nations of Europe who use the Roman alphabet do not 
 
CHINESE LANGUAGE. I 
 
 agree in the powers of the letters, and so differ in the spelling of the Chinese- 
 syllables. In the English language little has been done relative to Chi- 
 nese. Most of the spelling in Europe is that of the Portuguese, and for 
 this reason it is given in the following Table of syllables. 
 
 The pronunciation of the court, called in Europe the Mandarine Tongue 
 (in Chinese f^ *^' Kwan kwa Public officer s dialect) and which is spoken 
 by public officers and persons of education in every part of the Empire, is 
 different from the dialect of each Province: the Provinces moreover differ 
 amongst themselves. The dialect of Macao is different from that of Can- 
 ton, and the mandarine dialect of Nanking is different from that of Peking; 
 hence any one orthography must of necessity be imperfect. 
 
 The following Table exhibits the orthography of the Chinese syllables 
 both in the Mandarine tongue and in the dialect of Canton. To each 
 syllabic m affixed an nspful character, that the learner in acquiring the pro- 
 nunciation may avail himself of the assistance of the mere Chinese Scholar, 
 to whom alphabetic characters alone would be unintelligible. 
 
 By reading over the Table of syllables with different natives, the Learn- 
 er will be able to mark, with considerable ease, the varieties of pronuncia- 
 tion. Perhaps the pronunciation of the very first native who is tried will 
 differ consideiably from (lie orthography here given ; but on hearing sever- 
 al natives, the Learner will find that it is as near the general pronunciation 
 as the powers of the English alphapet will udiiiit. 
 
 A3 i 
 
4 A GRAMMAR, &c. 
 
 J.- 
 In the following Table, 
 A, ha3 the power of a in " card ;" / 
 
 X, as in " hat ;" W". 
 
 Ae, like i in "wine ;" 
 A before ong, like a in "ale;" 
 
 Aou, like open broad a coalescing with oo ; Sr &** 
 E, as in " me;" 
 
 Ee final, may be pronounced as the preceding by learners who have not the 
 assistance of a Native : they mark a sound which our letters do not con- 
 vey ; 
 Oa, as in " moan ;" 
 
 Ow, as in " how, cow, and sow," when used as a Noun ; 
 U, like the French eu in " Peu," except where in English it would sound 
 
 short; , 
 
 U, as in "but;" - 
 Y, final as in " Truly." 
 
 The pronunciation is thrice given ; first the English, and second the 
 Portuguese of the Mandarine Tongue, and third the Canton dialect. 
 
A TABLE 
 
 Of Syllables contained in the Chinese Language. 
 
 A or Ya 
 
 Ya 
 
 A 
 
 An ox Gan 
 Gam or Xgan 
 Van 
 
 Aou or Gaou 
 Gao or Xgao 
 Ox 
 
 Cha 
 Cha 
 
 Cha 
 
 Chat or Chi 
 
 Choi 
 
 Chat 
 
 Chan 
 Chan 
 Chan 
 
 Chang 
 Chang 
 GfcMg 
 
 Chaou 
 Chao 
 Chew 
 
 Chay 
 
 Che 
 
 Chay 
 
 1. A as in Card. 
 t{p The second degree, &c. 
 
 £ 
 
 Repose. 
 
 Che 
 
 Chi 
 Cka 
 
 fix Proud - 
 
 2. C. 
 
 jfc To ^end. 
 
 f^rT To produce ; bear. 
 
 -pl Long. 
 
 ^£4 To call an inferior. 
 
 3H Thi - 
 
 4jJ To know. 
 
 Chi oxChih 
 
 Che 
 
 Chik 
 
 Direct ; straight. 
 
 Chen 
 Chen 
 Cheen 
 
 15L To open ; unfold. 
 
 Chin 
 Chin 
 Chan 
 
 K TrUC 
 
 Ching 
 Ching 
 Ching 
 
 f )- Straight; right. 
 
 Chd 
 CM 
 
 Chok 
 
 /cAr Bamboo. 
 
 Chow 
 Cheu 
 
 Chaou 
 
 Tlirff Ugly ; disagreeable. 
 
 Chu or Choo 
 
 Chu _1J A lord ; master. 
 
 Chu — L* 
 
 Chue 
 Chut 
 
 em 
 
 ~Ay\ Coarsely done. 
 
 Chuen 
 Chuen 
 Shune 
 
 -W& A ship or boat. 
 
 Chun 
 Chun 
 Chun 
 
 ;lj|c The spring. 
 
 Chung 
 Chung 
 
 J+J The middle. 
 
 Chung 
 
6 
 
 
 a gramma; 
 
 A OF THE [Talk of Syllables. 
 
 ChUy 
 Ckui 
 Chuy 
 
 pj: 
 
 To blow tbe breatb. 
 
 Fun 
 Fuen 
 Fun 
 
 *y] To divide ; part. 
 
 Chwang 
 Vhoang 
 Vhoang 
 
 fe 
 
 A bed or couch. 
 
 Fung 
 Fung 
 Fung 
 
 ^T The wind. 
 
 
 
 3. E. as in Me. 
 
 Gat 
 
 5. G. har .1. 
 
 E 
 Y 
 
 <fc 
 
 Garments. 
 
 Agai 
 Oe 
 
 ^t& To love. 
 
 E 
 
 
 4. F. 
 
 Can 
 
 Ngan 
 
 Oun 
 
 t/£ ^ est > re p 0se - 
 
 Fa 
 Fa 
 
 Fat 
 
 Sfc 
 
 Rule: law. 
 
 Can 
 Gtu 
 
 Yan 
 
 K^ Favour; bounty. 
 
 Fan 
 Fan 
 Fan 
 
 K 
 
 To subvert ; contrary. 
 
 Gang 
 
 Agung 
 
 Gang 
 
 J^f Lofty ; high. 
 
 .Fang 
 Fang 
 Fang 
 
 m 
 
 A room. 
 
 Gang 
 
 Ngeng 
 Ying 
 
 Xffi Hard; stiff. 
 
 Fe 
 Fi 
 Fd 
 
 m 
 
 Fat, lusty. 
 
 Gacu 
 Agao 
 Gow 
 
 ^. Proud. 
 
 Fei 
 
 Fa 
 Fei 
 
 n 
 
 A negative ; not. 
 
 Gl or Gih 
 
 A'^e 
 Qek 
 
 ^fjlj The forehead. 
 
 Fd 
 Fd 
 Fit: /ok 
 
 # 
 
 Author of a system 
 of religion. 
 
 Go or wo 
 
 A'go 
 
 Go 
 
 36 «■ 
 
 Foo 
 Fu 
 Foo; Uoo. 
 
 Fow 
 Fou 
 Fiw 
 
 
 A Father. 
 To float. 
 
 Gow 
 Ageu 
 Gow 
 
 Bee 
 
 llai 
 
 /fW Double ; a pair. 
 
 6. HA 
 TO?; The sea ; large river. 
 
 
 
 Hoe 
 
 
 • Hoo is the pronunciation of Macao ana its neighbourhood, 
 before «, and i. 
 
 In the dialect of Peking it becomes iA or t, 
 
Table of SylLbles.-] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Han ' 
 
 Han 
 
 Han 
 
 Ha* 
 
 Hm 
 Han 
 
 Hang 
 
 Hang 
 Hoang 
 
 Hdig 
 Heng 
 Hing 
 
 Hon 
 
 lino 
 
 Horn 
 
 He 
 Hi 
 He 
 
 Hrang 
 
 lhang 
 
 Huong 
 
 Heaou 
 
 Hiao 
 
 Hew 
 
 Hi 
 Hi 
 Ihtp 
 
 Bin 
 Him 
 Bum 
 
 Btt 
 
 Hid 
 Hook 
 
 lint 
 
 H-u 
 
 Jj! Dry. 
 
 'tR. To hate. 
 
 ^Tp Walk ; A factory. 
 
 4\] Continuance. 
 
 •f£J- Good ; to love. 
 
 l|L Joy- t0 rejoice. 
 
 ^Sp Odour; fragrance. 
 
 Nl*n To understand. 
 
 m Therib5 - 
 
 JR], To learn. 
 ftjf- To permit. 
 
 II, vl 
 Hial 
 
 lltut 
 
 Ileum 
 Hiutn 
 
 limn 
 
 Bern* 
 
 Mini 
 Fun 
 
 Heung 
 Hiung 
 Hung 
 
 Ilin 
 
 11 ■/ 
 Hun 
 
 Iling 
 Hing 
 Hi»g 
 
 Ho 
 Hi 
 
 Fo 
 
 IIoo 
 Hu 
 Foo 
 
 How 
 lieu 
 Hue 
 
 Hung 
 Hung 
 Hung 
 
 lhr.i 
 
 lie 
 Wuk 
 
 llua 
 Una 
 Fa 
 
 (TTl Blood. 
 
 jJfSrc To suspend. 
 
 j|J|I To explain. 
 
 Jr(i Cruel. 
 
 Jit Inflated. 
 
 JltL To raise up. 
 
 *X Fire - 
 
 =jm. To escort; preserve. 
 
 ^ After. 
 
 ^*T~ Red colour. 
 
 -g& A line or stroke. 
 
 sty A Bower. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 {Table of Syllables. 
 
 Hwae 
 Hoax 
 Wae 
 
 Hwan 
 J loan 
 Wan 
 
 Hwang 
 Hoang 
 Woang 
 
 Hwo 
 Hud 
 
 Wool 
 
 Huiiy 
 
 Hoti 
 
 Wooy 
 
 long 
 Jang 
 Yaong 
 
 li oxjih 
 It 
 
 Yat 
 
 ten 
 Jen 
 
 Een 
 
 Jeng 
 leng 
 Ying 
 
 Iin 
 Jin 
 Yun 
 
 Jo 
 Id 
 Yok 
 
 IoK 
 
 leu 
 
 Yow 
 
 To destroy; spoil. 
 To revert ; repay. 
 
 tST 
 
 Ji\ Yellow. 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 HI 
 A 
 
 Living; animated. 
 
 To return. 
 
 7. J. as in French. 
 
 To exclude. 
 
 The sun ; day. 
 
 Certainly. 
 
 As before. 
 
 A human being. 
 
 If. 
 
 Softly: tender. 
 
 Kin 
 Ken 
 
 Kan 
 
 Kartg 
 Kang 
 Koang 
 
 to 
 
 \n:> 
 
 « Timid — also read No. 
 
 m 
 
 Mellow : comfortable. 
 
 loo 
 Iu 
 Yu 
 
 luen 
 luen 
 
 Vne 
 
 Inn 
 lun 
 Yun 
 
 Jung 'JT To sprinkle : to mis. 
 
 8. K* 
 
 Kae ; a . 
 
 Kai ^{A Ought. 
 
 Koe S^* 
 
 Kan 
 Kan 
 Kum 
 
 
 Sweet. 
 Root. 
 
 || Hard. 
 
 **•£ "3J" More, forms the 
 
 **'?& j5sl. comparative. 
 
 m 
 
 Kaou 
 Kao 
 
 Kow 
 
 Ke ; He 
 
 High. 
 
 ^orAri'A^. A monlent; por tion 
 £* ^»J oftime. 
 
 In the Peking dialect before « aod i it becomes ch ; or Is. 
 
Table of Syllables.) CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Kea 
 
 Am 
 
 Km 
 
 Keae 
 Kiai 
 Kme 
 
 Keang 
 Kimng 
 Koang 
 
 Kraou 
 
 Kiao 
 
 hu.u 
 
 hit 
 Kit 
 Kap 
 
 Kfem 
 Kiem 
 Kttm 
 
 h'ru 
 Kim 
 Kcm 
 
 Keuen 
 Kimrm 
 Kemme 
 
 Kent 
 
 Kit* 
 Kwan 
 
 Keung 
 Kiung 
 
 Kern 
 
 Hint 
 
 KiOH 
 
 Kim 
 
 Kim 
 
 Kun 
 
 M? A family; a house. 
 
 ^j£ A precept. 
 
 J$£ To speak. 
 
 3|$£ To teach. 
 
 /)? And; even to. 
 
 M Toset 
 
 Jflj TodwelL 
 
 Kntl TU 
 
 Ki.t H& Decidedly. 
 
 Keut ^^ 
 
 "/v* A dog. 
 
 King 
 King 
 King 
 
 ;g£ To respect. 
 
 ho 
 Ko 
 Ho 
 
 "SJ Should; ought. 
 
 Kd 
 Ki 
 
 Kok 
 
 ^ Every. 
 
 Koo 
 Ku 
 
 Koo 
 
 -Jt Ancient. 
 
 Kung __ 
 
 hung W't 
 
 Kung — *— 
 
 Kica 
 
 -^ 
 
 A«a j^St Alone; a widow. 
 
 A'wa "" 
 
 Jdx Prompt; alert. 
 
 Kwat 
 Kuai 
 Fae 
 
 Kwan Tpf Accustomed. 
 
 Kuan Si kuon " 
 Kwan & koon k£~* 
 
 £* A public officer. 
 
 3p: A flock. 
 
 Kwin 
 Kurn 
 Kwin 
 
 m 
 
 Fatigued. 
 
 Sg Poor, exhausted. 
 
 Kwang 
 Kuung 
 Kwoang 
 
 3ft 
 
 Light emitted from an; 
 body. 
 
 i^J\. To beg ; entreat 
 
 Kuing 
 Kueng 
 Kwing 
 
 m 
 
 The arm. 
 
 sfe Gold. 
 
 Kwei 
 
 Kuei 
 Kwci 
 
 m 
 
 A circle. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 [ Talk of Syllables. 
 
 Kwo 
 Kuo 
 Kuo 
 
 Kuo 
 
 Kui or ko 
 Kuuak 
 
 La 
 LA 
 
 Isip 
 
 Lie 
 L-ti 
 Loe 
 
 Lin 
 Lan 
 Lam 
 
 Lang- 
 Lang 
 Long 
 
 Lang 
 Ltng 
 Lang 
 
 Laou 
 Lao 
 Low 
 
 Lt 
 
 U 
 Lei 
 
 Li or lih 
 
 Li 
 
 Lih 
 
 Lang 
 l.-aiig 
 Laong 
 
 Lcaou 
 Lcao 
 Lew 
 
 To pa i 
 
 0. L. 
 
 afe 
 
 To come. 
 
 U 
 
 A rope. 
 
 4k 
 
 A wolf. 
 
 * 
 
 Cold. 
 
 & 
 
 Labour ; toil. 
 
 II 
 
 Urbanity. 
 
 ?/ 
 
 To restrain. 
 
 W 
 
 Two ; both. 
 
 7 
 
 Perfected. 
 
 Lti 
 Lit 
 
 Lik 
 
 L 'it n 
 Litn 
 
 Lean 
 
 Lrii 
 Lid 
 Leek 
 
 Lu 
 
 Liu 
 Lut 
 
 Lcuen 
 Linen 
 Lunc 
 
 Lew 
 
 Lieu 
 Laou 
 
 Lin 
 Lin 
 
 Lun 
 
 Ling 
 Ling 
 Ling 
 
 Ld 
 Lo 
 Lok 
 
 Loo 
 Lu 
 
 Loo 
 
 Lun 
 Lun 
 Lun 
 
 Lung 
 Lung 
 Lung 
 
 *"f/ Strength. 
 
 flvfe To compassionate. 
 
 J3&. Moderately; small. 
 
 s/& Law; statute. 
 
 70i& To reflect on «ith pie 
 * ^ sure. 
 
 {jj^ To leave. 
 
 ^ttK A neighbour. 
 
 JSL Other. 
 
 ifefc Green. 
 
 A wheel. 
 
 A millstone. 
 
Table of Syllables.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 if.; 
 
 Liy 
 
 iMi 
 
 L*y 
 
 Lu-en 
 Lion 
 Lune 
 
 Ma 
 
 Ma 
 Ma 
 
 Mae 
 Mai 
 Mae 
 
 Man 
 Man 
 Man 
 
 Ming 
 Manrr 
 Moang 
 
 Ming 
 Mcn S 
 Mang 
 
 Maon 
 
 g| Thunder. 
 
 fE| Confusion. 
 
 10. 3/. 
 
 fi| Ahorse. 
 
 Iff To buy. 
 
 |j£ Slowly. 
 
 jit 1 ' Occupied ; busy. 
 
 j£ Crue.. 
 
 jl/ a< , i Hair; plumage. 
 
 M w *- 
 
 jt/f Spft To disturb; obscure. 
 
 au •*— ' 
 
 Mi or mih m 
 
 'T! 
 
 Meaou 
 
 Mia* 
 
 Mtm 
 
 Met 
 
 Mii 
 Meet 
 
 Temple of idols 
 ancestors. 
 
 To extinguish. 
 
 M,i 
 Mv.i 
 
 Mooy 
 
 Mitn 
 Mien 
 Men 
 
 Min 
 Min 
 
 Man 
 
 Ming 
 Ming 
 Ming 
 
 Mo 
 Mo 
 Mo 
 
 Md 
 Md 
 Mok 
 
 Moo 
 Mu 
 
 Moo 
 
 M, H 
 M.u 
 Mdou 
 
 Mun 
 Muen 
 
 Moon 
 
 Mung 
 Mung 
 Mung 
 
 'S To depose. 
 
 rX * The subjects of a country. 
 
 HH Bright ; clear. 
 
 To rub. 
 
 Ft The eye. 
 
 Mother. 
 To scheme. 
 
 Forms the plural of Pro- 
 uouns. 
 
 Obscure. 
 
 Mtran or man 
 
 Moon 
 
 11. N. 
 To take. 
 
u 
 
 AGltAMMAR OF THE [ Table of Syllables. 
 
 Na 
 
 m 
 
 Nap 
 
 *A 
 
 To seize ; take. 
 
 Ntw 
 
 Nieu 
 N&ou 
 
 n 
 
 To wring. 
 
 Nae 
 Nui 
 Noe 
 
 M 
 
 Milk. 
 
 Nin 
 Nin 
 
 Nin 
 
 m 
 
 To thread a neeJk. 
 
 Nan 
 Nan 
 Nam 
 
 m 
 
 Soulli. 
 
 Mng 
 Ning 
 Ning 
 
 
 Better; rather. 
 
 Nang 
 Nang 
 Noang 
 
 # 
 
 Formerly. 
 
 No 
 No 
 No 
 
 im 
 
 Sluggish. 
 
 Ndng 
 Neng 
 Ning 
 
 m 
 
 To be able ; can. 
 
 No 
 N6 
 Nok 
 
 aft 
 
 To assent. 
 
 Naou 
 
 Nao 
 
 New 
 
 *%>L 
 
 To vociferate. 
 
 Noo 
 Nu 
 Now 
 
 M 
 
 Anger. 
 
 Ne 
 
 Ni 
 
 ■ Ne 
 
 # 
 
 You ; thou. 
 
 Nun 
 Nun 
 
 Nune 
 
 m 
 
 Tender. 
 
 Neang 
 Niang 
 Neong 
 
 ■m 
 
 A young lady. 
 
 Nung 
 Nung 
 Nung 
 
 m 
 
 Husbandry. 
 
 Neaou 
 
 Niao 
 
 New 
 
 m 
 
 Delicate. 
 
 Nuy 
 Nui 
 Nui/ 
 
 fo 
 
 Within. 
 
 me 
 Nie 
 Nik 
 
 m 
 
 To bide; abscond. 
 
 Nwan 
 Nuon 
 Nune 
 
 m. 
 
 Warm. 
 
 Nfen 
 Nien 
 Ncen 
 
 Ned 
 Nio 
 Yok 
 
 Neu 
 
 Niu 
 
 
 A year. 
 Cruel. 
 A female. 
 
 
 
 
 
 O ot Gi 
 8, Ngo 
 Ok 
 
 n 
 
 12. 0. 
 
 Ob ; so ; said iu reply. 
 
 Vicious ; bad. 
 
Table of Syllables.] C 1 1 I N E S E 
 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 
 
 13. P. 
 
 Pei 
 
 
 
 Pa 
 
 Pa 
 Pa 
 
 PS 
 
 ffi 
 
 To fear. 
 
 Py, poet 
 Pei 
 
 Pew 
 Pieu 
 Pew 
 
 
 To receive: ft 
 passive voici 
 
 Spotted liger. 
 
 P* 
 Pot 
 
 A 
 
 Eight. 
 
 Pin 
 
 m 
 ^ 
 
 
 Pat 
 
 Pax 
 Pae 
 
 Pan 
 
 Pan 
 
 n 
 
 To bow ; to worship. 
 A cicatrix. 
 
 Pin 
 
 pan 
 
 Ping 
 Ping 
 Paing 
 
 Poor. 
 
 r.i M. 
 
 Pan 
 
 
 Po 
 
 &. 
 
 
 Pang 
 
 _ 
 
 
 Po 
 Po 
 
 To tear; to d 
 
 Pang 
 
 a^y* 
 
 To help ; aid. 
 
 
 
 
 Poang 
 
 -^=- 
 
 
 P6 
 
 M 
 
 
 Pang 
 
 
 
 PS 
 
 Pok 
 
 Thin. 
 
 Peng 
 
 m 
 
 A fence. 
 
 
 
 
 Ping 
 
 
 Poo 
 
 
 
 Paou 
 
 Pao 
 
 Po» 
 
 # 
 
 To protect. 
 
 Pu 
 
 Pow 
 
 Pow 
 
 A shop. 
 
 Pe 
 
 
 
 Pat 
 
 Pow 
 
 To split. 
 
 v. m 
 
 P*or p ,A 
 
 Pak ?U 
 
 Peaou 
 
 Piao ~\T$ 
 
 To shelter. 
 The north. 
 Brittle. 
 
 Pun 
 Pun 
 Poon 
 
 Pung 
 Pung 
 Pung 
 
 & 
 M 
 
 A dish. 
 A sail. 
 
 Pew 
 
 -J- 
 
 
 Ptcan 
 
 m 
 
 
 Ptt 
 
 
 
 Puon 
 Poon 
 
 A cup; dish. 
 
 Pit 
 Ptet 
 
 m 
 
 Another: different. 
 
 
 
 14. S. 
 
 Pitn 
 Pien 
 
 M 
 
 Convenient. 
 
 Si 
 Sat 
 
 m 
 
 To sprinkle. 
 
5M 
 
 Sai 
 
 Sat 
 
 -fera 
 
 To agitate. 
 
 San 
 San 
 San 
 
 ^T 
 
 An umbrella. 
 
 Sang 
 Sang 
 Soang 
 
 H 
 
 Mourning clo 
 
 Sang 
 Seng 
 Sang ' 
 
 *V 
 
 Lank; lean. 
 
 Sacu 
 Sao 
 Sou) 
 
 m 
 
 A brush. 
 
 Se 
 Si 
 
 Sei 
 
 *w- 
 
 Fine; minute. 
 
 St of sih 
 
 Si 
 Sik 
 
 m 
 
 To obstruct. 
 
 Seaou 
 
 Siao 
 
 Sew 
 
 m 
 
 To melt. 
 
 See 
 Szu 
 See 
 
 * 
 
 Business ; affa 
 
 Sit 
 Sii 
 Seet 
 
 'A 
 
 To ooze out. 
 
 Seen 
 Sien 
 Seen 
 
 ft 
 
 Before. 
 
 Sed 
 Sid 
 
 iieok 
 
 M 
 
 To pare thin. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Table of Sy1labk$. 
 
 JH Theb< 
 jj Snow. 
 
 Sen 
 Siu 
 Seu 
 
 The beard. 
 
 Seui 
 Sine 
 Seut 
 
 Zeuen 
 Siuen 
 Sunt 
 
 Stun 
 
 &** ^hvV To range, to inspect. 
 
 To adorn. 
 
 Situ 
 Sacu 
 
 Sks . r 
 
 Xa yj]> Sand. 
 
 Shi 
 Xa 
 H&t 
 
 3k£ To" 11 " 
 
 Shae 
 Xai 
 Shae 
 
 Hjpif To dry in the 
 
 Shan 
 Xan 
 Shan 
 
 jfjlf To detract. 
 
 Shang 
 Xang 
 Sheong 
 
 Shaou 
 
 Xao 
 
 Shew 
 
 p* Above ; high, 
 jj^ Few. 
 
 %* fl£ Credit. 
 
 Shay "* 
 
Tabic of Syllables.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 B* 
 
 She 
 Xi 
 
 She 
 
 Shi 
 Xi 
 
 Ski 
 
 Shen 
 Xm 
 Shetn 
 
 Shin 
 Xin 
 Shu* 
 
 Shing 
 Xing 
 Shing 
 
 Shi 
 Xi 
 
 Shck 
 
 Shoo : thu 
 Xu 
 
 Shoo ; ihu 
 
 Show 
 Xru 
 
 Shi* 
 
 Shun 
 Xnn 
 
 8tm 
 
 Xui %fr 
 
 Shmy Vt* 
 
 Ik 
 
 m 
 
 Time. 
 
 Really : solid. 
 
 Good ; pious. 
 Spirit; God. 
 
 To ascend. 
 To ransom. 
 
 IT A book. 
 
 M 
 
 Shu-a 
 Xoa 
 Sk* 
 
 Shwae 
 I . 
 Shoe 
 
 m 
 
 To receive. 
 To obey. 
 Duty ; custom. 
 To sport ; play. 
 Fading; decaying. 
 
 fhirang 
 Xoang 
 Sheong 
 
 M 
 
 A pair. 
 
 Shwi 
 
 Xui 
 Shcul 
 
 U 
 
 To speak. 
 
 Sin 
 Sin 
 Sun 
 
 $Jf 
 
 New. 
 
 Sing 
 Sing 
 Shang 
 
 M 
 
 A star. 
 
 So 
 So 
 So 
 
 Mi 
 
 A lock. 
 
 Si 
 Si 
 Sole 
 
 #> 
 
 Common, vulgar. 
 
 Soo 
 Su 
 Soo 
 
 G 
 
 Sun 
 
 m. 
 
 To number. 
 Obsequious. 
 
 Sung 
 Sung 
 Sung 
 
 & 
 
 To present to. 
 
 Smy 
 Sui 
 Suy 
 
 m 
 
 All ho ugh. 
 
 Swan 
 Suoh 
 Hunt 
 
 n 
 
 To compute. 
 15. T. 
 
 Ta 
 Ta 
 Tm 
 
 A 
 
 Great, large. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE {Table of Syllable 
 
 Ti 
 
 Tat 
 
 m 
 
 To inform of. 
 
 Ttng 
 Ting 
 Taing 
 
 jfT Determined. 
 
 Tat 
 Tat 
 
 Toe 
 
 ^ 
 
 For; instead of. 
 
 To 
 To 
 To 
 
 r^ Many 
 
 Tan 
 Tan 
 Jan 
 
 40. 
 
 But; only. 
 
 Td 
 Id 
 Tok 
 
 W$ Toread ' 
 
 Tang 
 'I ang 
 Toang 
 
 tr 
 
 Suitable; ought. 
 
 Too 
 lu 
 
 Too 
 
 ^ All. 
 
 Tilng 
 Ttng 
 
 Ting 
 
 m 
 
 Degree; species. 
 
 Tow 
 Tea 
 
 Taou 
 
 J^Jf The head. 
 
 Taou 
 
 Tao 
 
 Tow 
 
 m 
 
 To run away. 
 
 Tti 
 La 
 Trip 
 
 2&/| To mix together. 
 
 Tt 
 Ti 
 Te 
 
 m 
 
 The earth. 
 
 Tsae 
 
 fai 
 
 Tiot 
 
 M* To suppose. 
 
 Ti or tih 
 Ti 
 
 # 
 
 To obtain ; can. 
 
 Tsm 
 fan 
 
 T^jS To injure. 
 
 Tak 
 
 
 
 Tsam 
 
 
 Ttaou 
 Tiao 
 
 M 
 
 To temper; moderate. 
 
 Tsang _ftA; The bold of a ship. 
 gang ; cam PVU 
 
 Tew 
 
 
 
 'Itoang 
 
 
 Til 
 TM 
 
 Tik 
 
 m 
 
 Inimical. 
 
 Tsdng 
 feng 
 
 ■j£t To augment. 
 
 
 
 Tsang 
 
 
 Teen 
 Tien 
 Teen 
 
 ^ 
 
 Heaven. 
 
 Tsaou 
 
 Cao 
 
 Ttow 
 
 _t5f. Morning ; soon. 
 
 Tew 
 Tieu 
 Tow 
 
 m 
 
 To, throw. 
 
 Tie 
 
 ^j. A wife. 
 
 Itti 
 
Table of Syllables.} CHINESE 
 
 LANGUAGE. 
 
 Trt or Tsik 
 
 T*sik -R'J Therefore . h£Dce « 
 
 
 y&. Clear. 
 
 Tseng 
 
 C.ang 
 Jsaumg 
 
 l/f* Aa artificer. 
 
 7io 
 
 ^U To sit. 
 
 Tseaou 
 
 Osm 
 
 Tstw 
 
 ^pF A plantain. 
 
 7s* 
 
 2wJt 
 
 A^P To do. 
 
 Tstay 
 Tsty 
 
 -4o To lead or borrow. 
 
 T«o« 
 7«oo 
 
 KB To obstruct. 
 
 Tub 
 
 fe. 
 
 fit ^is. 
 
 Xsow 
 
 Ceu 
 
 900 
 
 ^t£ To grieve. 
 
 TsU 
 
 ft 
 
 -fc S€veB ' 
 
 Tsun 
 Cun 
 Tsun 
 
 -*jm~ To honour ; respect. 
 
 Tstin 
 
 & 
 
 1ft Bdb ~- 
 
 Tsnmg 
 
 Tsung 
 
 :£& All; the whole. 
 
 ft 
 
 Jfe To marry a wife. 
 
 Tswan 
 Cuon 
 I sunt 
 
 ;fe|k To collect together. 
 
 7V«# 
 
 V&j To cut off from. 
 
 Tun 
 Tun 
 Tun 
 
 jjjg" To bow the head to 
 C^ the ground. 
 
 Tin** 
 
 fe- ToheaL 
 
 Tung 
 Tung 
 Tung 
 
 Irtj The same; wilh. 
 
 CSm 
 
 7mm 
 
 ]£§ To yield. 
 
 Tui 
 T&y 
 
 ^ff£ To push from. 
 
 ft. 
 
 ft. 
 
 7^ Autumn. 
 
 ^B Relations; kindred. 
 
 Twan 
 Tuon 
 Tune 
 
 dung 
 
 ^£ Short. 
 
 10. u. 
 
 ?W Title of respect. 
 
Urh 
 
 CI; urh 
 E, uge 
 
 ffi 
 
 And. 
 
 17. Wa. 
 
 Wa 
 Va 
 
 Mat 
 
 m 
 
 Stockings. 
 
 Wm 
 
 Vai 
 
 Ngoe 
 
 ^ 
 
 Withoutside. 
 
 Hfe E « 
 
 Wan 
 Ven 
 
 Man 
 
 m 
 
 To hear. 
 
 Wang 
 Vang 
 Moang 
 
 a 
 
 To hope. 
 
 We 
 Vi 
 Mei 
 
 j* 
 
 Taste, 
 
 Wei 
 Goei 
 Wei 
 
 # 
 
 To do ; because. 
 i 
 
 Wo or Go 
 
 Ngo 
 
 Go 
 
 & 
 
 1, 
 
 Woo 
 
 Gu ; NgU 
 Ing 
 
 s. 
 
 Five. 
 
 is. r. 
 
 Ya 
 Ya 
 Ga 
 
 3T- 
 
 The teeth. 
 
 Yae 
 Yai 
 Ak 
 
 M 
 
 Afflicted. 
 
 jang 
 Yang 
 Yaong 
 
 n 
 
 The ocean. 
 
 Yaou 
 Yao 
 Yew 
 
 m 
 
 To will to have; to 
 want. 
 
 Yay 
 Ye 
 
 Yay . 
 
 # 
 
 Night. 
 
 Yen 
 Yen 
 Een 
 
 B 
 
 Words, discourse. 
 
 Yew 
 Yeu 
 Yaou 
 
 m 
 
 To have. 
 
 Yin 
 Yn 
 YUn 
 
 m 
 
 Cause ; because. 
 
 Ying 
 Yug 
 Img 
 
 
 
 Shadow. 
 
 Yd 
 Yd 
 Yok 
 
 %. 
 
 To desire. 
 
 Yu 
 Yu 
 
 Ue 
 
 M 
 
 Fish. 
 
 Yuf 
 Yut 
 Yut 
 
 M 
 
 The moon. 
 
 Yuen 
 Yuen 
 Uue 
 
 m 
 
 Round. 
 
 Yun 
 Ynn 
 
 wan 
 
 # 
 
 Fog; cloud, 
 
 Yung 
 Yung 
 Yung 
 
 M 
 
 To use. 
 
Of the Tones.] 
 
 CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Of the Tones. 
 
 The syllables are varied by four Tones ; of, as the Chinese express i(, See 
 j^J Shhig i$, and which they dilineate on a hand, thus 
 
 The character ping 2JS. « CV en/ is the first in order ; shang _£ ' hi S n .' '** the 
 second; /.(//J; 'going,' is the third, and jd /\ ' entering,' is the fourth.* 
 
 These characters as applied to vary the pronunciation of their syllables 
 they define thus, 
 
 • The Cainrie make a general division of tUc Tonct iolo direct and oblique, ling $hing is lUc di- 
 
 rect, and tlic lUrec remaining onci they C aU t< Jl^ thing ffi oblique tone*. 
 
20 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of the tones. 
 
 The first, ping, denotes an " even path (tone) neither low nor high." 
 The second, shang, denotes " a high exclamation, violent and strong." 
 The third, keu, " is distinct, clear, and delights in a lengthened path," (tone). 
 The fourth j<b, is "short, quick, and suppressed." 
 
 The first, viz. p'ing-shing, is divided into upper and lower. Upper-ping 
 is called ^p _£ shang ping ; and lower ping is called ^ ~JC hid ping.* 
 
 Europeans have appropriated to each of these a mark, which in writ- 
 ing they place over the syllable like an accent. The marks are - Upper- 
 p'ing-shing'; "flower-ping-slung j \, shang-shing ; i, keu-shing; «, j6~ 
 thing. f 
 
 Hence the Europeans say that there are five tones, and generally speak 
 of them by ' first, second,' &c. according to the order in which they stand 
 aliove. The marks are placed above the syllable thus, — Tung, tung, tung, 
 tit. 
 
 Mr. Manning, a gentlemen who has studied the language with care, 
 says, that the pronunciation of shang-shing is effected, by shutting the Velum 
 pendulatum Palati, and contracting the parts adjacent. In keu-shing the same 
 operation takes place in the close of the syllable. In p'ing-shing, these are 
 quite open. Attention to this remark will, I believe, assist considerably in 
 distinguishing these three Tones. The jd-shing is easily distinguished, from 
 
 • SUag-piug, they some times calf^i Jjfe tsing t Ing, that is clear ping; Hia-ping, they call ^-^M 
 ch'u ping, that is, thick ping. 
 
 t The Chinese place this mark o thus ^^ to denote ping-thing ;— thns ^ to denote thing-Mug ; thus 
 /^" kcu-shlng ; and thus ^^ ji,shing. They mark the tones only < 
 
 .i--. .i-if-n-. 
 
OflheTones.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. %\ 
 
 its being extremely short, and generally capable of being spelled different. 
 ly from the others, as TiSn ; ti£n ; tien ; tH. 
 
 Those syllables only which end in n or ng have the joshing. 
 
 Another variety in the Chinese syllables is marked by an aspirate placed 
 with the other marks, thus, * v * * *. Only the mute initials, k, p, t, are 
 aspirated. The syllable Ch'd appears an exception, but is not really so, for 
 it is strictly the sound of Tcha. 
 
 A variety in the vowels e, o, and ti, is marked by a dot placed with the 
 above marks, tli us, - <* •* r *. It is particularly requisite to distinguish 
 c u in the Portugueze orthography from cu. The first cannot be spelled 
 by the Human Alphabet. It is something like tsu. 1 - The last is tsu* 
 
 The aspirate the Chinese do not seem to consider a modification of the 
 same syllable, but a quite different initial sound. 
 
 In the Pekin dialect the short tones are lengthened, or rather do not exist. 
 
 The pronunciation of (he Tones can only be learned from a living In- 
 utrnctor. They are not absolutely necessary to be understood in speaking 
 Chinese; but are yet essential to good speaking. Hence an early attention 
 to them is advisable. 
 
 On the opposite page is given a Table of syllables, for the purpose of 
 practising the Tones. 
 
N 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Table for Practising 
 
 Table for Practising the Tones. 
 
 S- I. 
 
 Sim -4p Before. 
 
 ? A 
 
 Musk. 
 Thread. 
 
 Labour. 
 
 |. II. 
 
 Gflft JfcfcV Majesty. 
 
 Gof j 4^ Rare. 
 God JS Dread. 
 
 |. HI. 
 /fj ~ffi Incipient. 
 
 KJ ^&Ef Chronicle. 
 
 Iii "mtV Remember. 
 
 %. IV. 
 
 Chu ggAIL 
 CAu ^T Lord. 
 C/ii ^5£ Manifest. 
 
 §• V. 
 Situ MS- Mom. 
 Seu BE? Noise of rice. 
 Ste -^^ Flourishing. 
 
 %. VI. 
 Tung ~&f East. 
 
 7 ""£ i m To reclif y* ^ 
 
 T<J ffe Exceedingly. 
 
 §. VII. 
 
 Ying$$^ Herbage. D 
 
 y '" S ^& Shade * 
 Yin Sjwk An9Werin S- 
 l'c >»^ Advantage. 
 
 <j. VIII. 
 Pin «^j§ A guest. 
 Pi" 1MJ An address. 
 
 A widow. 
 >ii 3BL Finished. 
 
 Palm of Ihi 
 hand. 
 
 Pin 
 
 Pie ^ 
 
 §. IX. 
 
 Changfjf^To stretch 
 ChAn 
 
 C/ui/i^ftJR Canopy. 
 
 Cho Jjj| To place. 
 
 §. X. 
 
 Kiang 1g3£ To speak. 
 KiungRftr Condescend. 
 Ktt -^1 A horn. 
 
 §. XI. 
 Chao~\ 
 Chab^Q Fish pond. 
 Chad fl§ llbutrioui. 
 
 Imperial 
 palace. 
 
The Tones.] 
 
 CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 19 
 
 §. XII. 
 
 7*** 
 
 2pC" A bench. 
 
 *. XIX. 
 
 Ka |J5, Mo-. 
 
 77! 
 
 iffe Virtue. 
 
 fai ^fcV To plant. 
 
 Ku rV Ancient. 
 
 
 §. XVI. 
 
 C/j -A^ To rule. 
 
 Ku 7f)£ Cause. 
 
 Szij 
 
 J^jjj A master. 
 
 fai ^tj To contain. 
 
 *; XX. 
 
 %. XIII. 
 &4# A l»ird. 
 Ymim jj^jjf Obsequious. 
 r.^-^ To hate. 
 
 Stsi 
 
 t£t Historian. 
 ptj Four. 
 §. XVII. 
 
 Kiln jfjn To examine 
 Kii* ^ij A sword. 
 
 A'i« 
 
 ^ Gold. 
 
 Atf ~*3] To seize 
 
 Yi 21 ° ae - 
 
 
 
 
 E)n 
 
 j$«lk. 
 
 *. XXI. 
 
 *. XIV. 
 
 fc',oi J& All. 
 
 Jf W / $p?. To explain. 
 
 Kiai yjh To assist. 
 
 s. XV. 
 
 Kin 
 
 <*£ Forbid. 
 
 _ >.-ft. End of a 
 
 pn y^i bridge# 
 
 KU 
 
 J*\- Hasty. 
 
 tt4l- Part of a 
 £"' n jjmi. church. 
 
 6. XVIII. 
 Kioo ~^/*_ Communicate. 
 
 O ^j£ To enter. 
 p 2^ A general. 
 
 Trwgr^|L To ascend. 
 T» 6 ^fi Specie.. 
 
 KM « Totw " t ' 
 
 §. XXII. 
 
 1 *"•■* ^^ To teach. 
 
 Ad jjif£ Though. 
 
24 
 
 Sui *!|J Marrow. 
 
 h. XXIII. 
 Kd ytr\r Vacuum. 
 Hb fo Fire. 
 H6 4£ Goods. 
 
 §. XXIV. 
 
 Utin ^£ Forceps. 
 KienYfifc Lessen. 
 Kitnp&p~ Mirrour. 
 Kid EEf Reins. 
 h. XXV. 
 Fun |gj To fly. 
 Fdn JR^ To subvert. 
 Fan >^ To swim. 
 FJ /«§• To issue. 
 
 fe. XXVI. 
 KiS ^fc A family. 
 
 A Gil A MM A It OF THE 
 
 Kid S A name 
 Kid jj^ To wed. 
 
 «. XXVII. 
 A"uo» E* An officer, 
 ffudn -^ To rule. 
 Kudn ~Wt Habit. 
 A'ud ;Fj?T To reprove. 
 
 §. XXYIII. 
 JiKe; e£f- First; great. 
 JF/ocJ J:fCj Precious. 
 Hod gfiu To admonish. 
 
 $. XXIX. 
 
 Che ^j[fe To cover. 
 CAe ^j" Expletive. 
 CA£ 13S| Matling. 
 
 ^ XXX. 
 JJT&* ^P Shield. 
 
 [Table, #c. 
 
 Kin ^|jjf Follow up. 
 Kan Dt~ Endeavour. 
 Kd =||] To cut. 
 
 §. XXXI. 
 Kim "44* Sweet. 
 
 Jidn j§& To dare. 
 
 -fell- Green and 
 Ka » fH red. 
 
 Kd ^jA. An oyster. 
 V XXXII. 
 
 Peng ri> A road. 
 Pdng jttfik A Tod. 
 
 xsl*g%&l IIard - 
 
 jYg-e ifcjlj The forehead. 
 §. XXXIII. 
 
 A r ff» 
 
 AVu 4*2. To advert. 
 
Of the Character, *c.1 CHINESE LANGUAGE. 25 
 
 - In looking over this Table, the Remark made above will be apparent, 
 Lf viz. that those syllables only which terminate in n, or ng have (lie short 
 tone. 
 
 The preceding is extracted from a small Dictionary of the Chinese, in 
 which the syllables of the same termination and the same tone are arrang- 
 ed together. It is observable, that instead of making use of the initial 
 sound, as we do, for the purpose of arrangement, they make use of the fi- 
 nal sound. 
 
 The preceding Table contains all the* final sounds in the Language. 
 It is intended that the learner should repeat it frequently with a native 
 Teacher. To each character is affixed a partial definition, that whilst the 
 Tones are acquired, the character also may become familiar. 
 
 Of the Chinese Character and Writing. 
 
 The Character of the Chinese is formed by a hair pencil, which they 
 hold erect and firmly betwixt the thumb on one side and the fore and mid- 
 dle finger on the other. The wrist and the whole of the fore arm rests 
 
 * The tal.lc that wit given before, exhibits all the initial sounds in the language. To spell any w ord 
 in the Language, no morels necessary than the anion of an initial and a final sound, as will be seen by 
 attending to what baa been said in the second page. Tbc Chinese avail themselves of this for the pur- 
 pose of secret correspondence. The persons corresponding fix upon a certain order of the sounds and 
 a rule for changing that order as frequently at they please, Uien instead of writing a character to give 
 the soand write only a figure to denote its place. On the same plan they couvi-rtc, by moving the 
 Cnger till Uicy arrive at the number which they wish to be noted by their companions when they make 
 a short paoae. 
 
 / 
 
86 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [ Of the Chinese CharacU r 
 
 steadily on the table. The paper on which they write lies straight before 
 them. They write in columns from the top to the bottom of the page, 
 
 and begin on tha right hand proceeding with column after column towards 
 the left. 
 
 Occasionally inscriptions, &c. over doors in temples and in shops, and 
 which consist but of a single line, are written horizontally from the right 
 hand to the left. 
 
 That the character was originally hieroglyphic, is evident, from an- 
 ^ cient characters which they preserve with great care : but for the sake of 
 neatness and dispatch in writing, the character has undergone gradual and 
 repealed changes, which have, in most cases, destroyed whatever there 
 was of emblem in it. They still however keep up the idea, and in their 
 Dictionaries often endeavour to illustrate the emblem which they conceive 
 to be contained in the Character which they are defining. And further, 
 in explaining compound characters they sometimes shew theallu sion which 
 there is in the meaning of the whole compound, to the meaning of every 
 part of which it is composed. 
 
 The varieties in the character now in use are five. First, the plain hand, 
 which is in most general use. It is called ^ ~j£ Chin* tsce, right cha- 
 racter. Second, the same written with freedom, but not so carelessly as 
 the running hand. It is called ^ ff hing (see, walking character. Third, 
 the running hand, called i^J^L Tsaoutsee, grass character. Fourth, a stiff 
 ancient character, much like the eking Uei, called ^ ^ 16 tsei. Fifth, 
 the seal character, called ^ ^ chum tste. The different appearance of 
 
ami Writing.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. V< 
 
 tln-sc will be seen in the word lung, the east, written five different ways. 
 Thus, 
 
 h\L ching-isei, or the plain hand ; 
 
 jlf hing-lsee, free hand ; 
 
 ft Isao'iiltee, the running hand ; 
 
 ~jM Iti-tsee, ancient character ; 
 
 ep Chui'n-tsqf, seal character. 
 
 The running hand is much in use in writing letters, and keeping ac- 
 counts. Prefaces to books are frequently written in it. Books themselves 
 are almost universally in the plain hand. All papers sent in to government 
 must be written in the plain hand. In the running hand and seal charac- 
 ter there are various ways of writing the same character, which, together 
 with the contractions made use of in the plain hand, constitute a great 
 source of difficulty in acquiring the language thoroughly. 
 
 Though the Chinese character appears complicated, it is, generally, 
 reducible to a very few primary parts which the Chinese call ^ poo, a 
 tribunal. — In Europe the pod arc called keys and radicals. They arc 
 
 two hundred and fourteen in number. On the opposite page is given a 
 Table of them. 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Table of Radicals. 
 
 Tabic of the Chinese 
 
 Radicals, exhibiting their 
 
 pronunciation, figure, 
 
 
 and meaning. 
 
 
 
 Characters formed by one 
 stroke of the pencil. 
 
 IV ' one. 
 
 Met i > to cover. 
 
 PiMg \^ isitle. 
 
 Mow 
 Yew 
 
 -S \ curved. 
 ~s£ more. 
 
 Kevin [ »° descend. 
 
 i K * «/f. "'die". 
 
 - 
 
 By three strokes. 
 
 Chit "\ a point. 
 
 i K*W J_[ gaping. 
 
 Keu 
 
 T~t mouth. 
 
 Pet J '»oi)f out. 
 
 y e 
 
 Yay 7, one. 
 
 Keu'i \ liooked. 
 — By two strokes. 
 
 Taou\ ' * [knife. 
 
 ( U c 3 
 
 JUl ~fr strength. 
 
 Paoil f~\ to fold. 
 
 Huiq 
 Too 
 See 
 Che 
 
 j | ioclosure. 
 ~f-* earth. 
 — J-» learned. 
 
 // to follow. 
 
 Vrh '"two. 
 
 Pi \/ spoon. 
 
 $%. 
 
 £_ to walk. 
 
 Tow _t_^ undefined, 
 c 
 
 Fang 1 recejitacle. 
 
 Sii 
 
 yyf evening. \ 
 
 M c 3 
 
 Hi t receptacle. 
 Shiy — I— ten. 
 
 Td 
 Neu 
 
 yS^ great. 
 ~~h^ woman. 
 
 FiJ F| man. 
 
 Pd |> to. divine. 
 
 Tsee) 
 
 ^£» child. 
 
 •W y/l to enter. 
 
 1 Li /knot in 
 
 ' ~P c 3 wood - 
 
 M'cen 
 
 J-*-» to collect. 
 
 P* y\^ ci 3 i.t. 
 
 Tsdn 
 
 ~T| a " inch. 
 
 /lci/Hg- |~~f wilderness. 
 
 Hdn ~j shelter. 
 
 Seaoii 
 
 >Jn little. 
 
Table of Radicals.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Show 
 
 Vtbe hand. 
 
 * 
 
 Che "35* branch. 
 
 (^JO slight 
 Pd < > 
 
 Wan ~^T literature. 
 
 Tow -^1— firkin. 
 Kin. Fp" pound. 
 Fang Jy square. 
 
 Ji p] day. 
 
 y«* i-A t0 s P cak# 
 * r "' /^I J ' ,e moo,, • 
 Md yfv wood - 
 
 Kc<,i A^ to owe. 
 
 negati' 
 
so 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Table of Radicals. 
 
 Tti 
 
 Jj- to stop. 
 
 • evil. 
 
 Chii ^^ a starT. 
 
 Wu -pjr not. 
 
 P& \X*j. to compare. 
 
 Maou ^p hair. 
 
 name. 
 
 Hb \ fire. 
 
 Cfiaoi* < ) nails. 
 
 Foo '^_afu;lier. 
 
 //fflou ^7> jo imitate. 
 
 Chwang iJ undefined. 
 
 Pe?n 
 
 F^T a splinter. 
 
 K« 
 
 3J 1 «'»c teeth. 
 
 A'ew 
 
 
 Kiuh 
 
 » > /Ma dog. 
 
 U-3 
 
 
 -By Jive strokes. 
 
 lieu!- 
 
 i •$* dark colour. 
 
 Yd 
 
 
 Kwa 
 
 /R melon. 
 
 Wa 
 
 ;5L «!-. 
 
 Kan 
 
 ~CT* sweet. 
 
 Sang 
 
 AJ^ to produce. 
 
 Yung 
 
 tEj to use. 
 
 * m 
 
 Tse* •*» sickness. 
 *7 c 
 
 Pd ^^C. t0 moun(J - 
 
 ^ ^ white. 
 
 « ^ skin. 
 
 M'ȣ HTf dishes. 
 
 jSft EJ the eye. 
 
 A/ow — ±-> a spear. 
 
 Sh) /\? an arrow. 
 
 Shi <^~\ a stone - 
 
 si 
 
 -J—- to admo- 
 /]"* nish. 
 
 &u JAj to creep. 
 
 lf ° ^L 8 rain - 
 //f«« ^* a den. 
 
 Hi j/ erect. 
 
. bamboo. 
 
 
 El" himself, 
 evcir to. 
 
 mortar. 
 
 ^ftbe, 
 
 CHINESE LANGUAGE 
 Yi ^¥* ' a pencil. 
 
 Cni'n r~| minister. .' * 
 
 m 
 
 SAe JL ■ the tongue. 
 
 (hutn M& to disturb. 
 
 CAow -W* a ship, 
 /van ItI inobedient. 
 
 Si ^*t colour. 
 
 //o<> t£.* atuer. 
 
 Chans: tjl mi iwect 
 
 am jfiLbhod. 
 
 Hhff ^J"togo. 
 A' y^C garments. 
 
 Fii f ijjj to oppose. 
 
 •^ t,j4fj the west. 
 — Bi/ seven strokes. 
 Kiin tU to see. 
 
 Kid 
 
 Ytn 
 
 Kd 
 
 Tbw 
 
 Shi 
 
 Chi 
 
 Pei 
 
 Tsbw -Ttr to walk 
 
 |> carnation. 
 
 tu a horn. 
 ==| words. 
 4JL valley. 
 
 I— J pulse. 
 
 ^ =» hog. 
 ^ reptile, d 
 E| sea shells. 
 ■^tow 
 
 lib 
 
 ]& the body 
 
 T ■ 
 
 the foot 
 
 5/ii/i 
 
32 
 
 Keii jfef a wlieel. 
 & 3g bitter. 
 
 */'»» Tip to tremble. 
 
 I 3 c ( t " tua - 
 
 '"" I IJ r Jfc«:> 
 
 K» P^F finished. 
 ?Si* 3^1 to P ,uck - 
 ^ ijf. a mile. • 
 
 — By eight strokes. 
 Kin ^ gold. 
 (hhig -J|j- long. 
 Man Pn a door. 
 f r3 ^ a mound. 
 
 ?" [ p.}** 
 
 W ^R* bighest. 
 CAuf ''pET wings. 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 F& "p^ rain. 
 Tsing -3||- azure. 
 Fd ^ false, not./ - 
 — By nine strokes. 
 Mrtn riff the face. / " / 
 
 -tp skin. 
 Vci 1& t t a h n e " r ed lea " 
 Few |[J: leeks. 
 Yin ~S* sound. 
 #<* 1§J the head. 
 
 Fa " S JSL wind ' 
 JV* ^ to fly. 
 
 SA<ty ■££ to eat. 
 
 SAoic g* the bead. 
 
 He fin g ^IJ- odour. 
 
 — By ten strokes. 
 
 [Table of Radicals. 
 Kaou "jg high. 
 Peaou -£& long hair. 
 Tow p| to fight. 
 
 Chang ll&l sacrificwine. 
 La 
 
 1*9 l^r perfume pot. 
 Ftwi J^ an imp, ,jfc 
 
 —By eleven strokes. 
 
 n ^ fish. 
 
 NeaoH Jf3.. a bird. 
 
 Foo g&^tasteless: 
 
 F* JJ^astag. 
 
 /UV ^Si- wheat. 
 
 horse. 
 
 Fwd . *|Et* a bone. 
 
 —.By twelve strokes. 
 Hwang -pp yellow. 
 SAod ^; millet. 
 Hi JH black. 
 
Table of Radicals, $c.-\ CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 S3 
 
 r .. -AjUk. to embroid- 
 Lke -fflj er. 4 ^ 
 
 — By thirteen strokes. 
 
 — By fourteen strokes. 
 
 —By sixteen strokes. 
 
 Pt 
 
 J1e^. nose. 
 
 M " s fill dra8 ° n ' 
 
 Mu»g ^ a toad. 
 
 Tsi 
 
 ;j§§v- even. 
 
 ii'tcW ^|||l tortoise. 
 
 Ttng }m tripod. 
 
 — By fifteen strokes. 
 
 — By setentcen strokes- 
 
 Koo jjA drum. 
 
 Chi 
 
 "j^teetb. 
 
 Y& ml instrument. 
 
 •SA<?u fci-l mouse. 
 
 
 
 
 The characters inclosed in hraces are considered as the same. The 
 first in the brace always exhibits the form of the character when it stands 
 by itself ; — those that follow shew the form which it bears when united with 
 other parts in compound characters. 
 
 Those characters w ilh the letter c placed below the definition, are used 
 only in compounds: c placed by the side of the character, denotes the same. 
 
 The compound form of yay, a city, is the same as that of ft it, a mound, 
 they are distinguished by one being- placed on the right, and the other on 
 the left as they arc marked. 
 
 On the mode of finding out words in the Chinese dictionary. 
 
 Under the preceding two hundred and fourteen Radicals, all tlie cha- 
 racters in the Chinese language are arranged in their Dictionaries. In 
 
3* A G HA MM AH OF THE 
 
 compound characters, the Radical is more frequently on the left side than 
 in any other part. But the Radical part is also to he met with on the right 
 side of the compound, as well as at the top and bottom, and in the middle, 
 so that no rule can he given where to find the Radical, further than that it 
 appears generally the most conspicuous part of the character. 
 
 In the Dictionary under each Radical are arranged, first, the characters 
 that are formed by one stroke of the pencil more than is necessary to form 
 the Radical ; second, those that are formed by two strokes more; then 
 those that are formed by three more, &c. So that in order to find out a 
 word in the dictionary, excepting the Radical part, reckon how many 
 strokes of the pencil are necessary to form the character which you wish 
 to find, then, under its radical and that collection of characters consisting 
 of the given number of strokes, look for it. If the character sought for, 
 is not to be found, either the wrong radical has been fixed on, or the strokes 
 not rightly numbered. 
 
 The only source of mistake in numbering the strokes is in square cha- 
 racters like /ecu, P the mouth, or those which are open at the bottom, like 
 kejtng\-y The Chinese reckon that keii, pj is formed by three strokes, and 
 Iteung by two : thus they first write the down stroke on the left ; then the 
 top and right side by one stroke of the pencil, and last of all the cross 
 
 stroke at the bottom 
 
 | first made; 
 
 ^ "~J second; 
 
 — last. 
 
Of the Dictionary, Src.\ CHI Is E S E L A N G U A G E. 35 
 
 Observe, that in writing, the general rule is, to begin at the left side of 
 the character; — to draw horizontal lines before those that are perpendi- 
 cular, excepting the lowest horizontal stroke in the character, which is 
 made last; — the left, top and right side of squares are formed before (ho 
 purls enclosed ;— the bottom horizontal stroke is made 'ast of all. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Peen, f«£ co-ivcuient, re found under the radical jin f which is on Ihej 
 left side. Pita has se\eu strokes beside the Radical. 
 
 Tsod, $1 to assist, is found under the Radical lie -fj which is on the rig It 
 side. Tsoo has five strokes beside the Radical. 
 
 Tseun, ^ the whole, is found under the Radically, J^ and four strokes. 
 
 Ping, Ji a soldier, is found under the Radical pit, /{ and eight strokes. 
 
 Gae, ^f to love, is found under the Radical Bin. ,t*\ and nine strokes. 
 In eae the Radical is in the middle. 
 
 V) 
 
 gae 
 
 Of the Dictionary in ichich the $j/l!abhs are arranged according to 
 their pronunciation. 
 
 The Dictionary of the Emperor K'ting he \f£l]i according to the above 
 arrangement, is that most in use in China. They have beside a dictionary 
 in which the words are arranged according to the pronunciation. 
 
36 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of the Dictionary, Sfc. 
 
 Some Chinese and Latin Dictionaries write both arrangements. In a 
 copious Index the characters are all arranged under the key as has now 
 been explained. Hiving found the character sought in the Index and 
 
 learned its sound, which is written by the side of it, the Learner has to turn 
 to the body of the work, in which the characters are arranged according 
 their pronunciation* and there he finds the definition. The utility of this 
 double arrangement is, that you may find a character either from having 
 heard its sound or seen its form. 
 
 Punctuation is generally omitted in Chinese writing. Historical books 
 and commentaries are usually pointed. They have but two points. A dot 
 placed between the characters to point off the Member of a sentence, and 
 which is called tow yjf , and a circular mark placed by the side of the cha- 
 racter when the sense is complete : it is called, 
 
 fe2£ '**"' 
 
 f|Jf cut off, 
 
 Thus, 
 
 -LA ,fi 
 
 -fe/V an aspiration 
 
 ■ ^/,* met 
 
 }\J (of) praise 
 
 ■zp^t <»»* 
 
 j^p expressed, i. 
 
 Vu! denotes an aspiration of praise. 
 
CHINESE LANGUAGE. 57 
 
 OF NOUNS. 
 
 It has already been observed, that words in the Chinese Language con- 
 sist of but one syllable ; we now remark that these are all indeclinable. The 
 number, case, or gender of Nouns produces no change of termination : 
 they remain the same in every mood, tense and person of the verb. 
 
 What is, in other languages generally effected by declension and con- 
 jugation, is, in Chinese, performed by separate monosyllables. 
 
 Before it is shewn how they form the number, case, and gender of the 
 Noun, it is proper to notice a class of words called Numerals, which gene- 
 rally precede or follow the Noun. From their name, it is apparent, that 
 they are used in numbering. But they occur not only when reckoning, but 
 also when mentioning one of a thing : as, ' a ship,' is expressed by, 
 
 m 
 
 chit* yf£ cw _^ ra» 
 
 ship. 3C single " Oi.« 
 
 As if they would say, " one sail ship." The import and use of the Nu- 
 merals are similar to the word sail when we say "twenty sail of merchant- 
 men." The numeral has an allusion to some quality or circumstance of 
 the Noun. 
 
 When reckoning or writing accounts, the Numeral follows the noun, as, 
 " Of merchantmen twenty sail." In Chinese, — 
 
38 A GRAMMAR OF THE, [Of I he Numnah. 
 
 _3j£. single ones. "J - ' tins • two , /y\\ »"■" J^ Mer 
 
 rlianJisc 
 
 ' White cloth a thousand pieces.' 
 
 />Lm P'ects. | thousand ore ')l clolQ I I 
 
 Ma Yiy 
 
 swallow One 
 
 i. e. ' A meal.' 
 
 Morning 
 ftfa 
 
 Breakfast is called ^ J*. _^T * 
 Dinner, the repast taken at noon ^^ ^"m, -^p J.* ( 
 The Canton people call it ^ '21 ^ Seat 
 Supper is called j£* jjfc*^ 
 y ^ w ' JuL a S[ "all cup, the numeral of lamps : 
 
 * PtJ. ■»**■ -tiiV. cop fc Ouc 
 
 'A Lamp.' 
 
r 
 
 , Numerals.] ClllM;Si: LANGUAGE. C9 
 
 (he numeral of the stories or floors of a house, and of things 
 piled one upon another : as, 
 
 up id rp.> '*»««■ "y 
 
 •f£ room. Jffi flight 'One 
 
 1 A story, or flight of rooms.' 
 
 Is, ' the first story.' 
 
 Tset ^|7 the numeral of joints, as the joinings in the cane andhamhoo. 
 Also of the paragraphs of a hook. 
 
 fy] paragraph. ' oot ^If book pfli discourse pfl l'ray 
 
 'I'll thank jou to explain a paragraph.' 
 
 Vfc blot. ^ Obc'numl.) ^ make j' : p section JjK Cut 
 
 2j5- come j;|; [ pipe I J bamboo " one 
 
 ' Cut a section of bamboo, and make a pipe to play on.' 
 
 Ti6 Mt a seat: the numeral of walls. 
 
 .J-pJJ wall. yEfc; »»« O nc- 
 
 ♦ A wall.' 
 
 Jgq wall. /fa .touc /-I" »eat ' one ^j. Unil' 1 
 
 ' To build a stone wall.' 
 
40 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of th e Numerals. 
 
 The numeral of mud walls is jo ffrS 
 
 SffimU. iL earthen \\lffi ' oue 5Jf| Trend 
 
 ' To erect a mud wall.' 
 
 Tsod jjp£. the numeral of cows and of mares, as 
 
 
 Yhj 
 A cow.' It denotes the feminine. 
 
 For quadrupeds, the numeral cite <j£ is generally used. 
 pp? "><i ytfc cA^ ray 
 
 4k>y borse. JsSC- sin 8 ,e ' One 
 
 { A horse.' See page 51. 
 
 IP] dog. 3^ single O.ie 
 
 < A dog.' 
 
 CHJiNG tM to stretch a cord, the numeral of chairs, tables, and sheets 
 of paper. Also of beds, couches, &c. 
 
 ^-' #; 
 
 ■' A table.' 
 
 2E c'>S»g Yiy 
 
 table. jf? ' One 
 
 IJgJi paper. #F£. s'retoh k One 
 
 »'. c. ' A sheet of paper. 
 
Of the Numerals.-] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 41 
 
 CHA yH The numeral of coats of mail, of small bundles or parcels of 
 pencils and of paper : and sometimes of letters. 
 
 * * >Ts«en-shan 
 
 ft- —2 &SL Ui- $ W 
 
 ' Take to Caza-branco camp a thousand coats of mail.' 
 
 CHE A& single; the numeral of ships, and of one of those things that 
 are in pairs. 
 
 /7ff shi P- J3<_ sin g'e " One 
 
 ' A ship.' 
 
 k»»e. ^.IJ come to J^_ *'"S ,e one, * three /WH 8hi P ^ \ Sbldier 
 
 ' Three ships of war have arrived.' 
 
 -TIC «■"«• jf •«•«* O- 
 
 < A hoot.' 
 
 CHE ijj^t The numeral of cases of books ; — Bix or eight volumes folded 
 up in one case, after the Cuiuese manner. 
 
 ife£~. — ' 
 
 lH Book 
 
 A case of books. 
 
 F 
 
42 A GRAMMAR OF THE [0/ the Numeral*. 
 
 CHE yfij A branch, the numeral of branches, candles, pencils, &c. 
 
 • m chi i^£ l& _LJT . chi YZy 
 
 fi3k\ candle. ^wax /^branch —One 
 \ 
 
 'A wax candle.' 
 
 ^=p' pencil. /J5C br ancb Om» 
 
 ' A pencil.' 
 It can also be said, 
 
 ~^ p- x . pencil. |3{ reed A 
 
 1 A pencil.' 
 C/«n (*L|i The numeral of showers of rain, blows of wind, &c. 
 
 ]^J rain. ^ «"" "^ One 
 
 e A shower of rain.' 
 • A heavy shower of rain,' is expressed by 
 
 f^pj rain. "*fc great |2|L **■ * One 
 
 '• The ship was lost in a heavy gale of wind or a Typhon.' 
 
 Tleaoi, Y tA stroke I t& yjy -Art ChuH 
 
 entirely. ^J (and was) /V great ' one jl]\y The ship 
 
 4|| ipriled J^'ill, (^'A'» ^received 
 
Of the Numerals.'] CHIxNESE LANGUAGE. 43 
 
 Ching fp^ The numeral of tune9 played on an instrument, and alao of 
 whole numbers, as, ten, a hundred, and a thousand. 
 
 i. e. < A tune. 
 
 ckXmg ^ Yi V 
 
 perfect (piece of) One 
 
 JjX^ number. /^ perfect One 
 
 ' A whole number.' 
 ' Play a tune,' is expressed by 
 
 Z?f% music. /[PC P erfcct (piece of) "' one \Y« Make 
 
 CH6 jjfjjj The numeral of pictures that roll up. 
 
 J33 picture. Jpft| cki ' One 
 
 * A picture.' 
 
 Chu jkfc The numeral of twigs of fragrant wood, used in the religious 
 rites of the Chinese, called by Europeans Jos-sticks. As, 
 
 'Rise early in the morning, and kindle a twig of incense, to pay respect to deity.' 
 
 •fjfctop.yrwpectto ££ twig ^fi kindle 3£ raUe ^ft* Clear 
 
 jj|™ deity, r^ incense " one J^j h* "/ " j "* morning 
 
 CAut'/i j^ The numeral of things strung together, as beads arc. As, 
 
44 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of the Numerals. 
 
 * 
 
 'A string of beads.' 
 beads. 3E| string ' One 
 
 « I am going to the shop to see a string of beads, (to know) if they will do to make 
 bracelets of, or not.' 
 
 ■t-J*., «*»«' TV? i pff chueng ^± - kin -yiy Gd 
 
 —J-' hand JK^ to pfa string x^ to look (&) ^J$ I 
 
 ,&n1 cW " >ftk w =F& cW © kiin 4\~ wdHS 
 
 ^f\ bracelet ^j^C make ^V beads ^j^ see ^±1 8° 1° 
 
 ^fj use. -f^fbe Pj worthy ' one ^jftj Aop 
 
 Chung jff The numeral of heavens; of which the Chinese say there are 
 nine : also of single garments. As. 
 
 =£*■ J&M* ~T & T J , 
 
 ^/V beaven. -fcE 8 , - three Sy Number 
 
 * The third heavens.' 
 
 s$C garment. "3J1. chung One 
 
 ' A garment.' 
 
 Fang Jj The numeral of squares of ink ; as, 
 
 J& ml _£, fang Vig 
 
 />t^$ Ink. yf square * One 
 
 F6 if" The numeral of pieces of silk ; or of large letters written on 
 silk ; also of images. 
 
OfthcNumcraU.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 «•»■ Art fi ™» 
 
 *. fe 
 
 piece of ' One 
 
 Fung ^4* The most usual numeral of letters ; as, 
 * To send a letter to a friend.' 
 
 2t- US if 
 
 closed "til" Send 
 
 P**g ~fc ,ho 
 friend. " tL| bo< 
 
 On the 2d instant I received jour letter.' " 
 
 if.*j: #g^ iLf£ ^Sived^^in- '^Eg-I 
 one 2J>J. conu'ng 7—* £«£ , . two(I) J~] 
 
 (this) 
 
 Wei ^i The numeral of persons of respectability 
 
 ^gjL visitor. ^L ** ' One 
 
 1 A Visitor ; a guest.' 
 
 Hang 'yrx The numeral of things placed in a row ; of columns of cha- 
 racters. 
 
 r\&\ tree*. >fj walk of " One 
 
 'A row of trees.' 
 
 "J"" character*. >|J column of ' On« 
 
 ' One column of characters.' 
 
4 
 
 i A GRAMMAROF THE [0/ the Numerals. 
 
 Hid h The numeral of blows given with the hand or a stick. 
 
 J> comedown. 'one -gj strilli * 
 
 ' To strike a blow.' 
 
 'He struck that man but one blow.' 
 
 -^"^ one ;*{EL Passing y\. lnan /f\* that JuL 
 
 ^ comedown. ~Jtht. wag ^J \ not J|Q| (Numeral) ^J 
 
 7/t» Jg&The numeral of multitudes of people, of squadrons of ships ; boats, 
 &c. 
 
 JQ ft su'ps- RJJC P' rate >^ ron (of) One 
 
 f/ica -3^" The numeral of strokes of a pencil. 
 
 — j-t . Au-a _ itrh ■ — t-^ . Ana ray 
 
 MM strokes,&c. , Two t=i=i stroke. " One 
 
 J/m% JHJ The numeral of parts or divisions of a book. 
 
 »_jl» w&n .JU *•■> ►— t *»<y Kay 
 
 _^V literature. J_J ancient IM I return " One 
 
 ' A section of ancient literature.' 
 Yuen ^ The numeral of officers of government. 
 
 *||jf kwin. 'B V ain . . „ m, 
 
 1 An officer.' 
 
Of the Numerals.-] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 47 
 
 Kan 4fe The numeral of bamboos, as 
 
 Aft m. £fi w» —*n, 
 
 1 A piece of bamboo.' 
 
 Ked ^[5 The numeral of clocks ; of stringed instruments, as a piano- 
 forte, &c. 
 
 « A dock.' 
 
 ,M ~\ Yi f 
 
 * One 
 
 ttfe* W ^ 
 FRf time I 
 
 /j^ hour > c,ock - ^v *««»<» 
 
 Kan ^(J A root ; the numeral of trees, &c. 
 
 ra# 
 
 One 
 
 bin 
 
 root /A tree. 
 
 w 
 
 KcH fj The mouth ; the numeral of draughts, as 
 
 «*e M n ** !* 
 
 >JJCte«. |_J month (full of) A 
 
 'A draught of tea :' also of doors and sword*. 
 
48 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of the Numerals. 
 
 Ke'6n PJl The numeral of houses, as 
 
 g «,ofo fp^ kef* k raj 
 
 'A house.* 
 • Your house is a very good one.' 
 
 -**-*»< r ery S* 
 
 y^t; is in " * r^ hoa8e (U) 
 
 Your 
 
 * 
 
 one 
 
 Also the numeral of the rooms of a house ; as 
 
 ^f***- j^foi 5H<«» —0?. 
 
 ' A room.' 
 Ke6n Mf* The numeral of any business or affair, as 
 
 -&■"* jt± kein : J** 
 
 * JL f* ' business. '\y piece of A 
 
 ' There is a very laughable affair,' is thus expressed, 
 
 **. « «» r* ery ^affair 
 
 $t;X* #S-J ajt-J — * 
 
 KioftjJ The numeral of games at chess; as 
 
 P^J grief Ypj to dissipate ^ at chess ^ gLe — * f* «! 
 
 T 
 
 Play 
 
Y 
 
 Of the Numerals.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Ktii >£fT The numeral of words and sentences. 
 
 pCl , P e * cb - '"V sentence " ~ "* One 
 4 A sentence.' 
 ' He pronounced a sentence which I do not understand.' 
 
 #1 tKI *!*, #" 
 
 n* 
 
 \ sentence 
 yet pp J*f£ spoke 
 
 Kiuen~ttL The numeral of volumes, as 
 
 £:r *;r —a # 
 
 Chi 
 Table 
 
 p» fem/ii • n:,dng 
 
 g^- »* J t§t book /£<. lai.i 
 
 ' The volume upon the table, is a volume of the work Lun-vu. 
 K6 -1RJ The numeral of men in general, as 
 
 ^3^ the (loor. ^f^ to come J\^ 
 
 It is Tery generally applied to things. 
 
 Kff pKH- The numeral of flowers and plants, n 
 
 > man 
 
50 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of the Numerals. 
 
 '• What is the name of this flower V 
 ^J CHlled ^Q,, Thi» 
 
 <what . (flower 
 
 -=* 
 
 name? 
 
 JTi> Jpt The numeral of grains, beads, gems, &c. as 
 
 ^ «*■ JP( * Wf 
 
 « A bead.' 
 
 Kob J$t The numeral of cords, &c. as 
 
 -jP" rf $k»M»s J$L koi * Yi v 
 
 'A cord.' — Also of squadrons of boats ;— shares of business, &c. 
 
 Kwa'e j$^ The numeral of fragments ; of tiles, and often of dollars, as 
 
 j?L "* % **"* — * Yiy 
 
 « A tile.' 
 
 ^yi «»i i^ fc«« — Yd,, 
 
 1 A dollar.' 
 Ko.l n %^ The numeral of pencils, of pipes, &c, as 
 
- 
 Ofthe Humeral,.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 51 
 
 
 ►)<■) 
 J pip 
 
 Kwhi $fc The numeral of affairs differing in kind, as violations of the 
 law, &c. 
 
 < This affair is settled quite well.' 
 
 Xeanj ^ The numeral of tales, as 
 
 ffits >&b«(u) ^» j " 7 *&**■ 
 
 ~|-t« -JT"* J^bar 
 
 «2«f f .« 
 
 weight. 
 
 Ledng l|3g The numeral of carriages, as 
 
 « A carriage.' 
 Z,4ng ^k The numeral of corners, &c. 
 
 ^£j w ^|'*v 'Hi 
 
 ' A corner. 
 
 Gt 
 
I 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [OJ the Numerals. 
 
 ■Lee ffiy The numeral of grains of corn, &c. as 
 
 yjV of rice. ^5Z 6™"" A 
 
 Leen 5ji[ The numeral of things connected together, or following in 
 
 succession, as 
 
 One 
 
 continuation 
 
 ch'6w "jt~£. *■' 
 
 thick >lV1 several 
 
 3ft close \ft\ «* ^ 
 
 "^ extreme. ^^ 
 
 A continuation of several houses extremely close together. 
 
 \fl] leisure. >|\ not y^. several One 
 
 L^T*- continuation 
 
 ^|^ obtain H day 
 
 A succession of several days without-leisure 
 
 -Ling -^jk? The numeral of suits of clothes, as 
 
 ^JC^ clothes. ']J^ suit (of) » -^t To 
 
 change 
 
 Af<5>a> toy^ The numeral of fields, as 
 
 $A miw } ^Pf ploughs JU iw»* ^ 
 
 'field. /The husbandman 
 
 fj|,,,5 _-? ^* 
 
D 
 
 Of the Numerals.] CHINESE LANGUAGlf. 
 
 Mien ifff The numeral of colours, flag9, &c. as 
 
 /j±± flag. fHJ '»« ' One 
 
 ' A colour.' 
 
 Met /tJ The numeral of pieces of ink ; gems, peaches, &c. as 
 
 5f£ come *fL dry ^ ' ao " -J ^ Pluck 
 
 ! peaches . 
 
 *2 £1 Ufe- #.£— 
 
 * Pluck two peaches, wash them, aud bring them to me to eat.' 
 Muii Pi The numeral of guns, as, 
 
 | k<ioon -S.) S{ eight j/C great |~*. upon J-j^ The city 
 
 Jrf hundred ^g[ gan. Sy\ there are ^jj£ battlement. 
 
 J*a-fP* The numeral of knives, whips, umbrellas, &c. 
 
 77 -~ It** —>'» 
 
 <A knife.* 
 5rfr e ** -f- kei /^. kiM -=*£■ gi L ,hi »*-ilrj -tf- v "" 
 
 ^ to .bade off^* go ^ present ^ I _J^ „p -J£ P* ) <ff} la!., 
 
 C uxbrclla 
 
 • Take an umbrella, and come up : 1 am now going out, and want to shade off 
 the rain.' i 
 
Y 
 
 I A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of the Numerals. 
 
 J£ ^'-> "JE* — •«• 
 
 ' An axe.' 
 
 Pet 7^, The numeral of pieces of silk, cloth, &c. as 
 
 • Into how many garments may a piece of silk be cut V 
 
 s{X- * ") ^> many 'fvf can ^JX. *** ' ° ne 
 
 W«U* _ k .. ln ^ ki ^^ _^ p . ef 
 
 piece 
 
 M M > #£ $&L m,™ JL 
 
 Pet JTJL The proper numeral of horses. 
 
 JIS ""' |7L pel >Yiy 
 
 ' A horse.' 
 Peen H" The numeral of fragments of wood ; flakes of snow, &c 
 
 ■^r^ chi t^ chi gfr jcfi Yiy 
 
 .' I *. arrived. ~A\jn known ~| * * now — — * ^ 
 
 J&&*'** ^k/rf -t^P«» 
 
 ^jJ cold /|\£ flying /( flake (of) 
 
 • When the flakes of snow fly, we know that the cold season has arrived.' 
 Poo p|J The numeral of works consisting of several volumes. 
 Puen 'Spy. The numeral of single volumes. 
 
 Seun/m The numeral of decades, or term often days, into three of 
 which the Chinese divide the month. 
 
r 
 
 T,et 
 
 torn 
 
 Of the Numerals.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 RJ «*■ t__k. "ow -^- honoured pj K 
 
 p * iK« UH /teg™ vj\ 
 
 |_J day*. TR-rf passed hire 4 ^ r Sir ^flj parting 
 
 'It is now ten days since we parted, Sir.' 
 Taou /J The numeral of quires of paper, as 
 
 f& chi 77 *•** — ■ Yi,j 
 
 ' A quire of paper ;' 100 sheets. 
 Tae^ The numeral of plays. 
 
 ' A stage play.' 
 Tow j=?|fj The numeral of sheep, &c. 
 
 ~y, ?««*- b§ ' ?w — ' "* 
 
 * A sheep.' 
 Tfin ^j|| The numeral of burdens carried on the shoulder. 
 
 -JPf vrinlinc ranch \\] Hill "^fr and bring J*|J instant ^ Call 
 
 J^ to boil /$L water (1) ' . ttvf time -fjfc the black 
 
 •fl^ tea. "^f wait ifM burden 3; ,0 «° «/V ■»»» 
 
 ' Call the black man, to go immediately and bring some spring water : I am waiting 
 and want to boil water for tea.' 
 
j0 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of the Numeral,. 
 
 Tcao'd IJj* The numeral of things that extend in length ; ropes, poles, 
 serpents, and often of fish in general. 
 
 *J?f* M - i^ tett0 ' i Yiy 
 
 'A piece of tape.' 
 
 Ic'S rr/i^The numeral of petitions to government, visiting cards, &c 
 
 ' y*!l > ^BL Present 
 
 > one (N.) 
 
 It is also expressed by 
 
 ^^ taoi yiiij -■' » pin ^«£ 77 
 
 ^© (N.) one .-Bffr petition 3M, Present 
 
 Or 
 
 
 #fceV» yay -rgy pin (rJ «"» 
 
 (N.) * one J=^- petition -t-' Present 
 
 7efen MJb The numeral of drops and of points, as 
 
 ff «- 8& ,a - — ■* 
 
 : A drop of sweat.' 
 ^ng Jllj The numeral of hats, caps, &c. as 
 
 Hjtfl mmiL. J j|f »«? " K4j 
 
 « A hat or cap.' 
 
Of the Numerals.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 57 
 
 - 
 To ^/s The numeral of bunches of flowers, &c. a< 
 
 3$ M %.» kli " 
 
 • A flower.' 
 
 To ^The numeral of a clue or roll of silk. 
 
 ^vif> silk. 7J*E clue (oO. ' A 
 
 Tity ^js]* The numeral of things in pairs, as 
 
 imllc ^PC wax - 
 
 A pair of candlesticks 
 
 Smnd,. ^candle !^ w« ^f P«* ° M 
 
 Willi 
 
 Tzcan ^r The numeral of secrets, plots, &c. 
 
 ^^drop 3|£- Line*. ^ Uratag.ni fj*j ^f* wi 
 
 m-^- w^< m- #*• 
 
 « I'll consult with you about this secret affair, which must not be disclosed 
 T«dn PU The numeral of things that are round ; they say 
 
 IS bread. jUI «* " ° n * 
 
 ' A cake or roll of bread.' 
 
 H 
 
/ 
 
 38 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of ihc Numerals. 
 
 Tw'an I S The numeral of paragraphs or part of a story. 
 
 Wan ^^ The numeral of the Chinese copper coin, which foreigners call 
 cash. 
 
 rath. 3C. lettered ' One 
 
 « A cash. 
 
 Wei JM The numeral of fish 
 
 ^fi,h. /£tail O 
 
 yl -^ «d Y» 9 
 
 ^tail 
 
 A fisb.' 
 
 ^Y^ fish. jffi ficsh 
 
 -A*z * "El ""* **' 
 
 ^T new /& teil 1*0 ' one 
 
 J^ Buy 
 
 It is often said 
 
 
 
 M" 
 
 « A fish.' 
 
 
 S.W^J gf The numeral of odes, poems, &c. 
 
 ptp ode. ^ (N.) an J*^ To 
 
 S7i/ng :3fc The numeral of carriages, chairs, &c. 
 
 ^| ktaoi jit ,/,«»£ fay 
 
 1 A sedan chair.' 
 
Of the Numerals.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. W 
 
 Shxcang M| The numeral of things naturally in pairs, as 
 
 stockings. 
 tsei 
 
 f A pair of stockings.' 
 * A pair of shoes,* &c. 
 
 %+h 
 
 The particle ckay ^ this or that thing, these or those things, is often Ck&ts 
 post- fixed to nouns, and is intended to detain the mind for a moment on the 
 thing, or things mentioned. Thus 
 
 ^pr tb«iUr».(l) /~j the moon J^| the sou ^Bj thes« are ^/f^ lights— .Three 
 
 In giving definitions, the word or words to be defined are first put down, 
 wilh chay post-fixed, and, after the definition, corresponding to che, the par- 
 ticle yay is insetted, to round and close the sentence. Thus 
 
 4t(i y,>a<t) -p. the Lord (*)Jfyf which U (1)*^ of (3) ^p body (4)^j|j that i», ^^ Heart- 
 
 (r)f£<A4.»*£*<*^T4 (2) ^ M«*. ^ <*< ~ »* 
 
 Bl 
 
60 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Nocss. 
 
 Of Number. 
 
 The Noun is the same in the plural as in the singular: they say, Oae 
 man, two man, &c. Thus 
 
 Yiy 
 
 And, 
 
 man. (SJ(N.) "~~" "* One 
 
 i e. * Two mea.' 
 
 K 
 
 The plural is distinguished from (he singular by a particle of number or 
 multitude either prefixed or post-fixed : also from a repetition of the Noun, 
 and often from the scope of the passage. Thus, first, by particles prefixed : 
 * A number of men.' 
 
 A .7" ^ To 
 
 man. ~^$? Many 
 
 ' A great many things.' 
 
 jf* (N.) "ft/] tbiugs. ^^» many ^J- Good 
 
 ' Sc .oral ships hare arrived.' 
 
 (forms the perfect.) JJJ arrived ^^ ■blp ^*< (N.) -p^ Several 
 
 Second, by particles post. fixed, thus, 
 
O/Nuaiber.J CHINESE LANGUAGE. - CI 
 
 II J (forms the pla.) /T\ Before J 
 
 " " (Master 
 
 CJCl bora -J 
 
 * Masters; tutors.' 
 
 =gf- order. JfctJ merchant ^ J Hang 
 
 t. e. ' Hang-Merchants.' 
 
 jjfi* order ; species. _y\. Foreign 
 
 t. e. ( Foreigners.' 
 
 ^fcf^kind. |/P: Vagrant 
 
 • Banditti ; pirates, &c.' 
 7& ^£ which is prefixed may also be post- fixed. Thus it mny be said, 
 
 Z^* many. y\. Man 
 
 1 A great many people.' 
 
 Third, by a repetition of the noun. Thus, 
 
 i. c. ( All men; every body know?.' 
 
 Lastly, from the scope of the parage, as 
 
68 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Nouns. 
 
 4££ keai 
 
 F)y presented to 
 
 f&* tXn * ill* /se? 
 
 Eg ought Ji-LL ,u,s 
 
 ^f J to (this place) ^pj Have 
 
 ' fll the officer) ^X. to be «/V man 
 
 .-magittrate. 
 
 /j^p district * ^i taken (and) )$£> properly 
 
 TO mutually /\. man 
 |Ef j right PJ^i- come 
 
 ' There are persons come here td fight : these persons should be seized, and carri- 
 ed before a magistrate.' 
 
 That the character jin, though singular in form, is to be understood as 
 including two or more persons is evident, since one man could not fight with 
 himself. In all writings, it is from the scope of the passage chiefly, that the 
 number of the Noun is ascertained. 
 
 Of Cases. 
 
 It is already evident that, strictly speaking, Nouns, in the Chinese Lan- 
 guage, have no cases, for they do not undergo any change of termination ; 
 but as this work aims only to afford practical assistance in the acquisition 
 of the Language, the usual division of cases is retained. 
 
 The cases of nouns are formed by particles. The particles te2|b$ per- 
 taining to, and chS ^ pertaining to, form the genitive case, as, 
 
 Afr I'M A,h ta *«* *"** ^ m<n 
 
 ^ pencil, fpj (gen.) (E^ Mr 7© Hien 
 
 * The pencil of Mr. Hien.' 
 
O/.Gu*.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 63 
 
 iCL («•■•> JUL "**] 
 
 lanf\ 
 "pj: mother. ~f 
 
 Menem* 
 vtti ' '^ tsei 
 
 i. t. * The mother of Mencius.' 
 
 The student, however, is not to expect the invariable use of these particles ; 
 they are often omitted, as 
 
 S@f statute. 4ZZ law *ffi empire J\^ Celestial 
 
 i. e. * The laws of China,' or, as they style their country, the Celestial Empire. 
 
 The particles that form the dative case are chiefly yii, ife to, kxcu, ^ 
 passing to, tuy, ^ towards; over against. Thus 
 
 ki 5^ cti ;vfA. ling 
 
 (N.>-«r 3^,thi» 9S- V tt$eut ^t& him { 3^ t0 I'f Voo 
 
 1 Present this to him.' 
 
 ,1 (jj|3 #?:. 
 
 ^/Ij before J fi$f. spoken «2P£ I 
 
 Nthe Master. 
 
 ^£ born 3 ^^2- "> EL » 
 
 m*- #i ip #?- - 
 
 I . e. * Speak to him.' 
 
 To before the name of a place is rendered by taoii ?$] to; at; arrive nt ; 
 and chi ^ to ; even to. As 
 
I GRA M H A I OF THE [Of Nouns. 
 
 V 
 
 p r i~* #: 
 
 ^ came 
 
 The same sentence may be rendered without the verb lag, to come. A*, 
 
 ' Yesterday 
 Macao. 
 
 
 v Macao 
 
 > Yesterday 
 ^3£ teln ' 
 
 
 
 
 3^lJ arrive at 
 
 
 
 The usual request 
 
 on the address of Chinese letters 
 
 is 
 
 
 ~l~$ provincial MTJ* to carry 
 
 ^^ trouble (you] 
 
 .j£ 
 
 This 
 
 3j«JQ city. 
 
 ■~f-\ to 
 
 -ftya lei 
 
 i^ Sir, 
 
 IM 
 
 sin 
 
 letter (I'll) 
 
 »'. e. « I'll trouble you, Sir, to carry this letter to Canton.' 
 
 The Accusative is the same as the Nominative. 
 
 The Vocative is formed by a particle denoting invocation, and following 
 the noun. As. 
 
Of Case.'] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 6j 
 
 Chi 
 Lord 
 
 The ablative is formed by (he particles i/ezo [if, from ; tsee Jfj, from ; 
 tsting ft£, from ; tiing fflf, with ; e ]>X, by. Thus, 
 
 from 
 
 J did,-or J0Q nation -f(j2, 
 
 III'."' ffl 
 
 \ Canton 
 ' He came from England to Canton.' 
 
 At~ ktat eg* gi %g M ^^ T«V 
 
 'ffcT the street. <$& me 4^7 sir > PR 1>ra y» 
 
 | I i goont(to) |HJ wHU -£|L respected 
 
 * Pray, Sir, will you walk out with me V 
 
 ^ft .et to Up not /J § in JP/f That which (yon) 
 
 TIM |Vt i | .M« -JTTJ * 
 
 infciior.. (1) Jj^ by it T , »upciion,(do)y^; hate 
 
 (I) MJjfkTi^fc 
 
G6 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of fcotms. 
 
 To denote the instrument, instead of by, they adopt the word, 2/ung, to 
 use. As 
 
 /V mau - -fgJQ Mabbcd J J knife ' J ^ a small Jj] using (or bv) 'fljjj He 
 
 Of Gender. 
 
 The gender of nouns is determined by particles denoting male or female : 
 sometimes by the scope of the passage. JZ/iX denotes one of the human 
 species. The masculine is determined by the particle nan: — as nanjin, 
 J^ 2% a man. The feminine, by the particle neii : as, neii jin, I ~fe a 
 woman. A child, is expressed by urh ^ ; the character tste, ^& so i, forms 
 the masculine ; as urh isee,-^!^ a boy ; neu forms the feminine, as ruii 
 urh, JflL ]£f a girl. 
 
 The masculine of beasts, fishes and domestic fowls is made by kting, &t 
 and the feminine by mod -J&. Thus, a horse, is ma ffi ; a stallion, mu hung 
 & t Wj ; a mare, vtaviob -ffi. ,R|. 
 
 For the masculine of quadrupeds mow tfc is also used ; and for the fe- 
 minine pin !fc. Thus, new, -^ a cow — common gender ; pm new, -^ Jjfc 
 a cow ; m6xc new, -^ Jj£a bull. 
 
 For birds heungife forms the masculine, and tsee fljfe forms ute feminine. 
 
Of Gender.'] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 6T 
 
 These rules are however frequently violated, and heung new 2^^. a bull, 
 is to be met with. — Also new koo ^f -^ a bull, new kung ^-^a bull, and 
 new mod, -^r -^ a cow, &c. 
 
 Things without life have no note of the masculine or feminine gender. 
 Every thing that is perfect or superior in its kind is considered mascu- 
 line : the imperfect or inferior feminine. The sun is considered mas- 
 culine, the moon feminine. Heaven is masculine, the earth feminine. The 
 perfect, superior, or imaginary male energy in nature, is expressed by 
 ffiyang. The imperfect, inferior or female, by y'm f& or f^. These two 
 characters often occur in philosophical works. 
 
 To gome nouns the words (see, ^p> a son — and iirh, Up the ear, are post- 
 fixed — as euphonies. Ch& Istd, ^ jj| a table. 
 
 4^ £** 7& Kl ") 
 
 /A few pencils. 
 
 Fur the application of these no determinate rule can be given. 
 11 
 
\ 
 
 GS A G R A &J M A U OF THE 
 
 / 
 
 ^D./£C77r£S 
 
 In the Chinese language are, as the nouns, indeclinable monosyllables. 
 
 As \>e, £l white ; he, ^ black ; chiing, ^ long ; twan £g short. Thus 
 
 Pi chd, $& £f white paper. 
 
 -S b i ack Yiri 
 
 When expressed unconnected with a substantive, they frequently take the 
 particles lee and chay after them, as ch'ung chat/, ^ jjf heavy ; kaoii tee, 
 ffi jjsj high ; te tee, $} fa low. Also, when they follow the substantive 
 verb. As, 
 
 ' This rice is good.' 
 
 » good. 
 
 The same, however, can be expressed without either the verb or the par- 
 ticle.— Thus, 
 
Of Comparison.] CHINESE LA NGUAGE. 
 
 » 
 
 kaoit y|» mi 2<=2- Che 
 
 good. "yP^ rice ^Q- This 
 
 In grave composition, the particle tte is seldom used The Td-hau, the 
 first of the Four Books, lias the following sentence : ! 
 
 IP^ ruins y\W „ J a ~ ™\ wiU arise *1 — » benevolent One 
 
 'tuns. ° 
 
 **** "" ■ |l» '«"? i |=« fctc* na- .=jg- jring accom- j,ay i^* *,a 
 
 affair: .Mia ih.s J I^CJ tion Itjp* m&tiag one 53\£. family 
 
 one lljj This | p bc-put-in one ^JV family / L_« i.r.'olc 
 
 ■an pRrresaed(by)^U confusion y\, man pp* modating 
 
 4±2 *»V <•«- >«y -fep *» ^s. '*« covet- ^ 
 
 ^t. tannines one ^>V iu 3w oa * and 
 
 olcnt 
 jung accom- yfaj 
 
 tttg do- yuy ■ £J« *> -«^V 'i" covet- yay |-r\J kwi 
 
 pXJ nation 
 
 t«iana-J=^.^>i -«fe *. moving- g" It fcEJ Aire ,». Alug- 
 
 tion. (1) F^j »ard ^jSJg caasc (is) f/\. wicked JvGJ nation; ^J?>^ will aria 
 
 O/" Comparison. 
 
 The Comparative degree is made by Lang, Jg more, prefixed ; ItwV, ^iP; 
 passing, poskfixed j podjou, Hfl^ not as, — or so ; pe J£ compare ,-^ic, ^ 
 more ; far an, |ga gain; c*ae,^ again, /x»p</# te, %% ^ Jrb compare can- 
 not; yue, ^J§more, surpasssing; yuc fa, Jjfc ^j£" more putting forth ; yew, 
 % excess. 
 
 The application of these will be more easily perceived by a few exam* 
 pics than by rules. Thus it is said, haou, -fj£ good. 
 (1) ***«£. Ti-fc 
 
70 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Oi- Adjectives. 
 
 JA^ More i 
 
 Better, 
 good 
 
 j*T B° od J 
 
 ^w *«* ( Bctter - 
 
 y}VJ paHtagj 
 
 This is fietter than that/ may be rendered in these several ways. 
 
 t that (U) [ Tbw 
 
 >fB" j 4ft • 
 
 ]^J_ more -H-l P arcd with 
 
 "' (that. jThi,(H) 
 
 Tint 
 
 /■this / 
 
 J that is >This 
 
 #l" 5 10*' v 
 
 Ayr* good. J'Lk compared with 
 
Comparative Dtg.] A GRAMMAR OF THE 71 
 
 j£f* S ood. ffft"') 5g C * ? J 
 
 VUiat 
 
 »J 
 
 
 10 
 
 .PC more -h! 
 
 »f» 1J> fi 
 
 compared with 
 
 Instead of yix haou, the words hvcan haoii, jOy j|| still good, and tsae hoaii, 
 fj& {If again good, may be used, and the sense remain the same. Again 
 
 sylf can (with)' JjP 
 
 5 
 
 I That 
 M > 
 
 it" 
 
 compare 
 
 ^|\ not 
 
 ?|>ttiog forth W^ ) ^ C * ? l 
 
 "^ I that 
 
 #£ 10" » IB- ' 
 
 This 
 
 y\_ t compared 
 
 • Whether is this or that the better ?' 
 
 
 CM -v 
 
 that \ Thi» 
 
 M 
 
 yft 
 with 
 
72 CHINESE LANGUAGE. [Of Adjectives. 
 
 * Whether is this greater or smaller than that ?' 
 
 kS -CJft ^"'* 
 (N.) ;*!£*. more 
 
 /J]* that ^J N little ^1^ more J?J|£ whethc 
 
 This chest is smaller than the other.' 
 
 .Thi. 
 
 JMrno'c. ^fc'hel ^J *»i ^f ch. 
 
 I the other 
 
 »>icl (ft* 5 J££&. 1B" 
 
 c This room is cooler than the opposite one.' 
 ^ room. 3E?j* over against ^j^ c ° o1 -^V room 3©- CA? 
 
 This room is cooler than the opposite one.' 
 
 tU t ^JU. le&ng ^ fStn, 
 
 I This 
 ^ The face ^B pacing jg «« fRf """ 
 
 This evening, Sir, you take tea sooner, and dine later than last evening.' 
 R^lan ^rice -^ more J| Sir, (you) ^ 
 
 p This 
 
 M>^ evening, -j ffi: late jpT soon ( and ^ -"jA. drink HJ£ evening 
 
 ^lEt*"* >&* M ' ~%L M -fS^"*" 
 
 ;*{PJ passing ^- eat ->fK tea Jgp- honoured 
 
Comparative Deg.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 • You are not so dutiful as your brother.' 
 
 ^££ * M0 * Ct *"*"*' //r* ** ""ST ** Ah* Si 
 
 sZf- filial duty. J^ brother JiJ> your Sy\ not. 'j^ Yon 
 
 P V » J^R next <f^p cau ,Hj com 
 
 { This piece of ink is not so good as that.' 
 
 -fc*-' 2 "* -bw' 1 * tat* 81 5^J ck? 
 
 /f square ^H «, itjaT ink afi. This 
 
 -fet*"'* i'SrM ^K" 1- -fc^-* 
 
 >tr S ooa. ^7p|>tllt ^}\not y*/ 
 
 square of 
 
 The Chinese say 
 
 ^t-* born. -£*l not J?H (well as if) ^jp% not ""jf* cbil.l JjL» 
 
 i. e. ■ This child had better not been born.' 
 ' The sooner the better/ is thus rendered, 
 
 jfcj 8°°«1- /\2> n,ort ~t~ soon /^ 5Iore 
 
 • The sooner you attend to that business the better.' 
 XTgood. 4}!. Lines. ^J(5 tUat Jfc j"ou ^ More 
 
 ;gi #£ p'l,„ JjLZ. 
 
 ' The more 1 hinder him, the more be comes.' 
 
 7C£ h< f-n. hinder »jfc ' 
 
 Tie* 
 
 Tl.il 
 
 endearonrs 
 
 #tr & 
 
 tlie more 'fflft him /JjH£ inor. 
 
1 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Op Adjectives. 
 
 * This article is damaged; if you move it, you will damage it still more.' 
 
 J^J. more M/J move £p? injur- j(|3. chS \ 
 
 J-ThU 
 
 > thing 
 
 * Last year was more plentiful than this year.' 
 TV *«» ^JR fart r$g /Nr ;2£: «*» 
 
 •^ this ^IPJ. more ~»7f; abundant (and) 'fgjf Last 
 
 ./it ■*•■ -tA •* ffe^ sM "*' /n "'*" 
 
 "^Pyear.^ /^than 3g£ plentiful <^p year , .«:i,', 
 
 ' A great deal better than this.' 
 jp( (N.) /?$ by >£r S°° d 3^- M,,ch 
 
 ;J lE3, this :3 ]Pf_ passing ^W more 
 
 ' Greater than the whole.' 
 
 \kfa '«»* & im k «~° morc -JU ™ 
 
 /PL£ whoIe ' one ^ MS- or passing / V 
 
 Great 
 
 Otherwise expressed by the phrase 
 
 ~yj whole. "' one J\_ 
 
Comparatize Deg.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. H 
 
 When two things are compared, and the one said to be longer, shorter, 
 or higher than the other, the positive is used in a comparative sense. As, 
 
 L '»«» *»un ^ «?» . Tun,, 
 
 'J (about aa inch.—) \ three ~ ft3 Short 
 
 i. e. ' Shorter three inches. 1 
 
 ^V. cubit. one JjjJ High 
 
 i. e. * One cubit higher.' 
 
 The Comparison made in English by ' rather' and ' than,' in different mem- 
 bers of the sentence, is made in Chinese by ning k'i ~p$ 5S£ lather should or 
 would, and po'O AS "JtT ^ not would, or poi) lean 5x^\ not dare 
 
 « I would rather sell goods for a small profit, than keep them till they spoil, and 
 
 lose the first cost.' 
 
 _J_» /»«*« the ori- J£ hi _|« *'* wrfi cUi ^p> G» 
 
 ^f- giaal (cost) J^ goods -J^ out (*) JJ,jj£» obtain *J% I 
 
 ^T/V t» receive «^\uot ^p'J |,rofit J ?V rather 
 
 ^3*5 damage (A.) PJ would ^^ money PJ would 
 
 -^/J break ^ keep _g^ sell _^J> >a UtUe 
 
 ' 1 would rather die than dare to offend Deity.' 
 
 JjfffMtf. ^f.f.oiocur /flit T^J would ^ I 
 
 tm tu»l an offence tjX. k<)» -r-£ «] tjfcf 
 
 ^•fi (before) JJX. dare ^Hu «"« (&) =2p 
 
 Mte 
 
to A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Adjective 
 
 *I would rather live in Poking than go to Nanking.' 
 ^ the south y\\ not jfc the north jjfy\ wish »jj% I 
 
 "^■«v ^-""v *»« / fV''" i *nfcr »'''■• 
 
 ^^ Capital, ^t go-to ^gji Capital (&) f±l to dwell iu rrt™ r*th«l 
 
 The adverb 'than' after the Comparative adjective, is often made by yu 
 ~}fc; thus they say, 
 
 //^ than -pi oot-any p5j lofty (&) ^^ Things (*) 
 
 /V heaven. .^rpj more 80 y\^ veat ^^ of (1) 
 
 i. e. « There is nothing higher or greater than heaven .' 
 
 In the preface to an historical work, it is said, 
 
 ml M ~£* /,i? ^^ ** "as irh ^fc Foi 
 
 J.HJ i»-of-course ^7\. next -^J of those ||TJ and yfi^ Now 
 
 -dfc±> m » -tfcfe keu * tt ^A, 
 
 -course -5 ^ . not-any / |T^ authorities (2) ^77 powers (S) 
 
 f<?« ^ rrt fc«r* _£*. chi 9*. chi 
 
 JQ. history y\^ Heaven's ^[PJ raore-so J ^_ ,. ofU) f^ of (1) 
 
 /3r wh0 (*> "J 60U : /J^ tnan J^/f tll08e //f «''Ose 
 
 man. -^ his ,/V Heaven : -Jfc the most -£#? »i le m ost 
 
 ^/\. next ;^* Its -Etl weight- J^_ magnificent 
 
 e 
 
 t. e. • Now, of the most magnificent powers, and the highest authorities, there are 
 none more so than heaven : The next is none other than the Emperor, and next to 
 him (in power and authority) is the historian.' (1) 
 
 (1) /fl«v.g|«fc«£f a* 
 
 AAz *"* till lKi "** *' -J-*** knXtt -** ° h * 
 
 1 p forms J.-IJJ i.-of.t 
 
Superlative Deg.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 77 
 
 The Comparative is also made by a repetition of the adjective. Thus 
 
 . thi« 
 |4 *J pertaining to. p5j high J JHJ J'Li compared with ' one 
 
 < That hill is higher than this.' 
 
 The Superlative Degree, 
 
 Is made by the following particles prefixed, tseuS, ^ to exceed, to cut 
 off; tsooi, Jjfc to exceed; great; te. yay, — -j^ number one; ting shang, 
 p ]Ji the top of superiors ; shit fun, ^-f-ten parts. Thus haoit, #f 
 good ; haoukwo, ^ fj£ better ; tseue haou, ffr ^ most good, best. 
 
 « That river is the deepest.' 
 
 wz. B|p m*&> «sr fjp~ 
 
 1 This lake is the shallowest.' 
 
 ^* '•*• S&tt M *3 cti 
 
 W« (to) a& ) 
 
 r I t^* 
 
 »~» >ffcfw ) 
 
 4 The Viceroy id the greatest man in the Province.' 
 
 man. * «je ^J^ it 7[>& ,ht ' I * " "* *_*- of t*> 
 
 /'v. great .J'lP* number tl| governor H miil*t(n ( | 
 
 One 
 
 province 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Adjectives. 
 
 1 This article is the best.' 
 
 jH tainiugto. 'one ^g^' ^jfl ™ V 55, Ci? V 
 
 [ article > This 
 
 jftZ. $&"—. #*' JW S 
 
 ' This tea is of the best quality.' 
 
 JR. ft TS '"* # ^ ^ c * ? 
 
 tm »rJer JJ^ top ^.leaf ^^ This 
 
 IH J pertaining to. I , superior / fc. is -VT\ tea 
 
 ' I am in perfect health.' 
 lit: lively. ^ W ell(&) ^T part, -J— ten 
 
 (lam) 
 
 The words poSkwd, 5$^ not passed; and tao£ ft*$ ^ gsf] to the ex- 
 treme, post-fixed, form the superlative degree. As 
 
 the extreme. 3;IJ to ^JhI Poor 
 
 ' Poorest.' 
 
 [i', Rich 
 passed 
 
 I 
 
 J. ^ honoarable 
 *^J> not 
 
 ^j 
 
 « Richest' 
 
Superlative Deg .] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 79 
 
 ^jT ■» >^J now )$ pleasant ^j |S that rjfo I 
 
 ^(^ by much JH| returning to ^J\ not (to be) _ — -, little '>»— '" 
 
 —7-*^ fete *"•*•* ^Rt A,rd rfcfc hV. *"■"».<■ 
 
 ^J"» not ./l/^ the great jfciAJ. passed: M-^p time /|l,l the great 
 
 >?P "so (good.) JfL (province) fjj) and yQT was |^| (province) 
 
 ' The short time that I was at Kttang-se was most pleasant ; to return now to 
 Canton is uot equal to it.' 
 
 ' Tiie best wine.' 
 
 Tsool 
 Most 
 
 the top P. superior ^T, this >*J"| manding 4r) ^j^ My 
 
 -^p WO I.p peeom- /fpf'"' >S*- '*"" fr>' hi * 
 
 flwj b1 4* J'Ll p.ircdwith IJOj ononis) _^|L honoured (Sir) j' j cottage 
 
 -y P" >f/r> ' ,,! ^& *"*■ yfr c " ~K* w 
 
 «^|\ not '[*[> yours (&) 3^. more 'fTl dwelling |» iufcrioi 
 
 7*5 cottage TGi' 4 ^. J^'uperlor ft?; height 
 
 ' "T^ inferior ^" -It ™"l>»rcd with [flj I»d 
 
 ' My house is a good height, and the house in which you live, Sir, is still higher 
 but compared with )ours and mine, hia ia by fur the highest.' 
 
80 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Adjectives. 
 
 The particles !;'&)$&. the extreme, yay tan* ^ — ■. first order, cha j2£ 
 to the extreme, may be either prefixed or post fixed. Thus 
 
 ' Most holy ;' — absolute porfection. 
 "JfO «'.<««• ->^» Clif 
 
 — jp holv, or perfect. ' [ ■• Most 
 
 It is applied to Confucius, who is considered as having been absolutely 
 faultless. 
 
 ' Most ugly, depraved,' &c. — the worst in all respects. 
 
 Z7X <■'"* 
 .-4f. the i 
 
 extreme. (1) y^ of (2) 
 
 ^/(^ Badness 
 
 
 
 ' Most true.' 
 
 
 
 r kei in the 
 > extreme. 
 
 R 
 
 chin \^ , 
 
 * The best.' 
 
 rAtit 
 true, or 
 
 fyl Most 
 
 m 
 
 hao& 
 
 good. 
 
 ^ J ■ order 
 
 
 
 First 
 
 1 This is 
 
 the best sample 
 
 of tea.' 
 
 
 pj^J pertaining to. 'the first xE is "TJ*" **■ 5^1 
 
 | . superior T?r<, sample I |H| 
 
 (rtng- 
 order 
 
Numbers.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 81 
 
 J J He performs the best work, you should employ him.' 
 
 #? "FT** -p««r ,»«» /rrsr 
 
 , bun I J may .. | . work- the first 'f\Q He 
 
 ^^X to work. J[^ therefore ^L man (ship). ^^ order /JjH doci 
 
 ■fll engage ^J* yon fj^J of T, superior 
 
 The Chinese invariably divide persons and things into three degrees. 
 " Superior ; middling, and inferior." Thus, shang ting, 4fe Jp superior 
 order; chilng ling, £g Ffj middle order ; hid ting, ^ -tt inferior order. 
 
 •The best of the superior' is expressed by ting shang, _£ J£j the top of 
 the superior. And 'the worst of the inferior' by 
 
 ^tf -f^Lov 
 
 Numbers 
 
 Are expressed by three different series of characters : first, the plain hand, 
 in most frequent use, second, a more complicated character used on formal 
 occasions and in bonds, contracts, &c. to render, it is said, any alteration of 
 the numbers more difficult. This appears analogous to our writing num- 
 bers in words on'many occasions. Third, numbers are written in a running 
 hand, which is generally made use of in keeping accounts. Numbers writ- 
 ten in this hand may be considered the figures of the Chinese. 
 
A G R A to M A R O F T H E 
 
 {First series) 
 Yay ' 
 
 Urh m 
 
 n 
 
 -t 
 A 
 
 % 
 + 
 
 woo 
 U 
 tst 
 
 pa 
 kieit 
 
 Shi 
 
 the 
 y&y 
 
 shl 
 6rh 
 
 ,hi 
 
 tan 
 ski 
 
 sei 
 
 {2nd.) (3rf.) (E»g.) 
 
 3E I ° ne 
 
 ^ 'I 1W ° 
 
 ^ ||| ,l,rCC 
 
 ^ X f ° Ur 
 
 #J = cight 
 
 t 
 
 ^ + 
 
 
 S +* }- 
 
 (/7r*< «ri«) 
 shl ~~ f~* 
 
 [Of Adjectives. 
 (2n<f.) (3d / i CU ^h S .) 
 
 tcod 
 
 shl 
 
 IS 
 
 shi 
 
 tsi 
 
 shl 
 
 •pi 
 
 she- 
 kel it 
 urh 
 shl 
 urh 
 shl 
 
 yay 
 
 urh 
 
 shl 
 urh 
 
 o 
 
 A 
 
 
 ,«]„ 
 rj" 
 
 *&■ 
 
 I: 
 + 
 
 }» 
 
 
 — JH 
 
 n+ 
 
 5 
 ■jf- 
 -t 
 
 + 
 
 it 
 
Nut 
 
 ibers.~] 
 
 CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 83 ( 
 
 (First teritt 
 
 (Ind.) (3d.) (E*g.) 
 
 (FiYj* MTJn) (2nrf.) (3rf. 
 
 > (fi»0 
 
 
 , 
 
 ■IT 
 
 
 ■ i .■ 
 
 
 9 s * 
 
 ~3Z 
 
 " 7 
 
 y*y 
 
 — k " _Hl 
 
 one "\ 
 
 yi'.n 
 
 ^ 
 
 say > i. e. &c. 
 (thus) ) 
 
 P « 
 
 5$. #" 
 - % 
 
 hundred f 
 
 tan 
 thi 
 
 + 
 
 # Y} 30 
 
 y<*y 
 
 (cypher) \ 10 i 
 one I 
 
 tt 
 
 m 
 
 4 i 
 
 3*9 
 
 - m 
 
 ~\ 
 
 thi 
 
 + 
 
 pi 
 
 6 ^[o = 
 
 
 VXH> 
 
 m. 
 
 
 ling 
 
 * !£* 
 
 ?102 
 
 thi 
 
 + 
 
 urh 
 
 - % 
 
 J 
 
 li 
 thi 
 
 + 
 
 ft" > 
 
 yun 
 yum 
 
 a • 
 
 }- 
 
 Id 
 
 -tr' 
 
 
 y<*y 
 
 — _s 
 
 } 
 
 thi 
 
 + 
 
 pi 
 
 W ^ r- 
 
 L 
 
 pa 
 thi 
 
 A 
 + 
 
 S** 
 
 yty 
 thi 
 
 - 3P 
 -f n 
 
 r 
 
 ketii 
 thi 
 
 y*.v 
 
 
 3A *+? 
 
 y*y 
 pe 
 
 4rh 
 
 - ** 
 
 >120 
 
 r* 
 
 "ff 
 
 S* I' 00 
 
 thi 
 
 + * 
 
 J 
 
 (!) A mark which denotes a repetition rtt Ue character immediately preceding. K J 
 
84 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 [Of Adjectives. 
 
 (First 
 6rh 
 pi 
 
 9*y 
 
 tsi'tn 
 
 9*9 
 
 ts'eln 
 
 yay 
 
 pi 
 
 tsi'cn 
 ling 
 
 y<>y 
 v&9 
 
 tstln 
 
 ling 
 lhi s 
 yay 
 
 series) 
 
 (■2nd.) 
 
 m 
 
 ft 
 
 m. 
 
 <£ 
 ft 
 
 ft 
 Ax 
 
 (3d.) (Eng.) (First series) (find.) (3d.) (Eng.) 
 
 if] 
 
 4 
 
 ^•U 
 
 
 joo— 
 
 Hrh 
 tsvln 
 
 y*y 
 
 van 
 
 shi 
 
 wan 
 
 y&a 
 
 pi 
 w&n 
 
 — It „ ) 
 
 .# 
 
 ' > 10,00 
 
 + & + }..... 
 
 
 * 
 
 .±1 > i,ooo,e 
 *& i.ooo,o 
 
Ordinals.] CHINESE LANGUAGE , 89 
 
 The Ordinals 
 
 Are made by the character te |^ order or turn, prefixed to the above car- 
 dinal numbers. Thus 
 
 Tt 
 
 Order ^ 
 
 First 
 
 -J- M I twelfth ,, y I 
 
 ^^ } 
 S*£r _ ; second 
 
 ~~~.*rk VtwcnUeth ^ 
 
 + J ~" }- 
 
 • - •«» 
 
 e 
 
 i *** /■ EievenU ' 
 
 'y*y J 
 
 The first series is distinguished by the name 
 
 > numeral 
 ~^p CfeMtttm, FpJ tei 
 
g6 AGRAMMAR OF THE [Op Adjectives. 
 
 The second series is called' 
 
 J- numeral 
 — 1 — characters. JJ 'J 
 
 And the last series are called 
 
 f numeral 
 — J— characters. |^J 
 
 weight 
 
 Also called 
 
 ^t.' *) 'gfL Sw Name 
 
 /• numeral 
 
 J=J jn| (a district) 
 
 —J— character.. ^R^J ««'*>>* 
 
CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 OFPROXOT'XS. 
 
 The Personal pronouns are — Singular < c • I or me ; rib, ffi thou or 
 thee ; i'a, jfa he or him.* 
 
 Plural go mun, jf^|^| we or us; ne mutt, 1F]i$ye or you ; ta mun, 
 jfU $L ,lie > or tnem - Tnus 
 
 i. e. ' 1 do not kno*.' 
 
 "F^ r alrrad 
 
 V have 
 
 Gl 
 
 ... 1 
 
 ' liuvt 
 
 >■ bare 
 
 ^**« L. d . ^;;: 
 
 t. e. ' I have found (lie book which I sought.' 
 J|l pl.ee (or) ^ft !Tf. 4^1 * y P^ dtr ^ Uk ^ Gi ^ 
 
 i. r. ' Have you tlic key of ray study.' 
 
 • The Chinese bare not appropriate prooonu* for " »lir, and it." Id *ooi* books tlic pronoun ' I' ia en. 
 prcued by »*»f -££and 'be or thaf by Jlra !ft\. Tuc Tartan sometime* tue Iti inMa,'f| I, Jflj[f lur 'we.' 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Op Paonouns. 
 
 ^J bai ^W more 'ftjjj he Jjfa 
 
 Thii 
 
 v^ bad-wicked. 
 
 iti 
 
 affair 
 
 >P ■• XE is (than) jj\ tba 
 
 fcE ftil #f*> 
 
 /pfj- assertion. ^Q^ him ^q \ 
 
 transacted 
 
 "TBTtt 
 
 i. e. ' He did not commit this bad action ; it is merely the false assertion of a per- 
 son who hated Mm' 
 
 gXi me. ^H^i to >JJ^-tocomc Sg> the ink 'J^' give |apj Pray 
 
 t. e. ' I'll thank you to pass the ink to me.' 
 
 «r «is, jur jits 
 
 36 °" 3 i -^H * erc are ^r* » ot V- "' l 
 
 &*i 2££> A~ 3fe* } 
 
 > to know. _^ U e 
 
 e. J We never saw this affair, only there are persons who have informed us of 
 
 affair 
 
 it.' 
 
Personal.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 f\* man JrpJ disturbed 4\Q T'd 
 
 > They 
 
 P? reproved _/ r_» is J * one / 
 
 -^ (therefore >• " *' 
 
 I them. 
 
 came 
 
 «'. e. ' TAe-y came all at once, and made a disturbance, in consequence of which the 
 master severely reproved them.' 
 
 Go ^. the first person singular, is sometimes understood as the first 
 person plural. — As 
 
 A 
 
 . man 
 
 Eft kKi 
 —is \zS( Empire 
 
 * 
 
 chiing 
 middle 
 
 
 
 
 « We Chinese.' 
 
 
 
 bstai 
 
 utive 
 
 verb thus — 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 jtn. 
 
 pi^ 
 
 r}j *** 
 
 £ 
 
 At i 
 
 
 
 It expresses, 
 
 'I am a Chinese.' 
 
 
 For the first person singular the characters^/1 ^t,yu ^, wo6 ^§, gan fifjr, 
 are to be met in writing. Denoting the second person singular, urh Hf 
 and jod ffc are met with. The personal pronouns singular are often, from 
 the scope of the passage, determined in a plural sense. 
 
 L 
 
SO A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Pronouns 
 
 Beside mun, the characters leng £*., pet 'j{l, chac $$, ngeu |,1J, and "]«*, 
 arc used to form the plural. He, she, it, and they are often formed not on- 
 ly hy tu fa and ta mutt fl*| fa, hut also by e ffi, he, she, it, they, his ; pe //J[, 
 he, she, it, they, his, also these, those;— Ice ^t the same ; and the character 
 che "3* is often used for him and them. Thus 
 
 AJ„ 0Mi -4j- took} ^ *■ HS » ot N E > e f 
 
 " (.inform and ^^ ' ^ < At present 
 
 y& S oi ) B^ time ^ff-Uin "[^ below) 
 
 •ft- , «r lit- 3£», 
 
 J. tucmorthese ; ^ 
 
 Wt ''*"'} ^Texsiting 'I/*' (bey RP. K " "} 
 
 S two * 
 
 a-pin 
 
 Ya-lio 
 
 < Ya-pin and Ya-lin are not here at present ; when they come, I will inform them 
 of the affair.' 
 
 jtti- &w) ^'iot(to) ^r rt | 
 
 • / |\ not '3^ me rf^. 
 
 ' You do not love me as he does.' 
 
 Your 
 
Persona/.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 91 
 
 lsaau (at) 
 
 * As Leang-haou, in the 82d year of his age, was called to stand in the Imperial pre* 
 fence, at the head of a vast number of Literati — he, in the evening of life, became fa- 
 mous, and was, by every one, styled ' wonderful' — you a little boy should determine 
 to belike him.' (1) 
 
 An" vs^aj, -£*,/, -£,,«« ^y,* ;y sh* 
 
 J\\\ ' ,F^ ca » III! •■"* "1^ not *»VV ( > l V^ The heart 
 
 "fef" M 7J£ irh *"7* poi Fl ***■ wtl ,ht "TF* f - 
 
 ;^j* it» flfj and «^JN not ^J»l\ scc > /Ivd look "'T* n0 * 
 
 «-*- «* -y r* pn *** -aft n,, g -£ w> ~/r "" 
 
 '>fvta»te. Xj\nol |£jj hear, ^jjg listen, JjJJ ami ^fJZ present, 
 
 i. r. * When the heart is absent, you may look and not see, hear and not percoive, 
 cat and not know the taste of what you eat.' (2) 
 
 -irr? *f«"7> p3 »t» the J-4 had -j— i nfathc ^3U •■** -jj. 
 
 jftgthaU ^C people 3(-J- (they) love J^ ,.,,.,.1, ^ , ffi Kt%* 
 
 ^g£ (ke, ha*. ^ tu« JZf> lov " *_-• *• >V «»«>" and -J"" "" }<» 
 
 -V '** 1|& - Mh -*? M £fc "" ,hing * -IS*. '""A T3 '«'- "■* 
 
 ^^ them. J£J| and which^^, them: J^j which ?*f- mother J^ people 
 
 /The 
 
 '.good 
 
 ' Prince 
 
 12 
 
M 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF TIIH [Of Paonouns. 
 
 ' The good Prince is the Father and Mother of his people ; (he is of one mind 
 with his people) ; What they hate he hates ; what they love he loves.' (I) 
 
 ChB chs ■£+ -£ sometimes occurs, the first as the sign of the Genitiye, 
 and the second as a Pronoun. Thus — 
 
 J the children. (1) /^ of (?) ^«- 
 
 i. e. ' Teach their children.' 
 
 chi JUL K «"> a 
 
 them ^FjL Teach 
 
 In many cases, the Chinese dislike the use of the simple pronouns 'you' 
 and ' I.* Amongsloquals. tlieyjoin 'you' with Ixiln Iced, ^J?f honourable Sir, 
 and laou yay, 3^- ff? old or venerable father, &c. which may be consider- 
 ed equal to ' you Sir ;' but in addressing superiors, the pronoun is omitted, 
 ami the title of respect U9ed in its stead. They would not say ' your Lord- 
 ship' — ' your Excellency' or 'your Majesty ;' but omit your, and use (he 
 words ' Lordship,' &c. 
 
 Instead of 'you,' in addressing the Chief Magistrate in a district, called 
 he^n IM, they use toe yay ^ ^C, eminent father. The Chief Officer of the 
 districts, called chow j>\\, is addressed by 
 
 "Jiff father. ^\^ veuerable /V Great 
 
 The Chief Magistrate of a province, is addressed by idjin J^ ~fc, great 
 man. The Emperor is addressed by 
 
 <i) had. ^ n -fc 
 
Personal.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 03 
 
 £* "*"<"' Kit N IS "'** 
 
 ^g; Emperor pf? Steps -p£j Ten thousand 
 
 I iking — .— «,v, JUl^ji., 
 
 |. Mfprewc. J - * below. /^X years 
 
 o o o 
 
 In speaking and in writing to these, whenever the pronoun 'you' oc- 
 curs, the above epithets are used. 
 
 The people, in addressing the magistrates by speaking or writing, instead 
 of * I,' use seaou lee fit] if\, little ; e, ^ pismire. Licenced Companies of 
 Merchants write shangpn }^ "j^f, merchant man. Inferior officers address- 
 ing superiors write pe eh? ^jjfc tf#. mean office, and shin ty body -.—equals 
 write 16 tfc younger brother. A Tartar Viceroy, addressing the Emperor, 
 writes noo Isa'i 3/f" #(, slave. The Chinese write ch'in Jg, servant. The 
 Emperor, for I, uses chin $?S; kwajin J\. ^, little destitute man. The 
 magistrates, in public Edicts, fori, use 
 
 -5jL temple. £f|* tribunal "^p" Origio«l 
 
 used by a Viceroy ; pttin fou ffi^Z; pitin keen J^ jfc, &c. according to 
 the situations which they hold. They generally address those who have pe- 
 titioned them in the third person. Throughout an Edict to the merchants, 
 after having once mentioned the names of the persons to whom it is addres- 
 sed, they would say, IcaB shingling J&pf f^, the said merchants. Some- 
 times, when warm, they use the direct address iirh, £J*?you. 
 
 The people, in writing to each other, use U $jfr, younger brother yu M, 
 stupid, instead of the pronoun I — and for 'you,' they use jin heung- 5£ ^, 
 benevolent older brother ; koojin Ji^ ffo, ancient man ; kooyeii jfc }£, old, 
 
91 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Pronouns. 
 
 friend ; laoii hefmg ^ ^, venerable elder brother ; heung tae •£* J>£, el- 
 der brother's sublime place. Thus, 
 
 I\ — « commeucing 
 
 ;• received J 1 ^ mooua 'V^ R*»P« 
 
 3?T O'O ^P7 beginniog y^- co 
 
 ., lther,&c. |i_) fourth ^& this if 
 
 ^ cot ' " 
 
 *-. Bt ^ ! 
 
 ^•^V- coming 
 
 mti younger -J^. ;>«<« 
 brother, ^f^ thit 
 
 ». e. ' I would respectfully mention, that on the 4th instant, 1 received your letter.' 
 
 Affecting humility, they write le, small on the side of the column; and heung 
 tae is put more distant from the preceding character than the other cha- 
 racters are from each other, in token of respect. They use pZ jfe, that or 
 there ; and tsee jj£, this or here, for ' you, and, I.' Thus 
 
 IP! d'ispwition. jfjj the "a™ ^RI bavc ""W CqUa " y i*t "'" H*- TUat 
 
 i. e. 'You and I have the same feelings or disposition.' 
 
 The Possessive Pronouns are made by tee ffi] and che "£, which form 
 the possessive case of nouns. Thus, singular, go tee fttj ^, my or mine ; 
 ni m \\'j <f$, thy or thine, yours ; til tee fil] $£, his or hers. Plural, go 
 mun tee ft*J ]\ n \ f£, ours ; ne mun tee f$ f>] j#, yours ; t'd mun tei 
 M fl*l #j. thei «' Or, gb che -£ |£, my or mine, &c. 
 
CHINESE LANGUAGE. "' 
 
 tfz. M'\ *«r ®°'U 
 
 i. e. ' My idea or meaning is thus/ 
 i. e. 'Whether is this hat yours or his?' 
 
 v room. ' "T 
 
 ?'. p. ' My room.' 
 
 'Myself, yourself, himself, themselves,' &c. are made by tsee he ^ jfj, 
 self, self; added to go f£, ne j$, t'u % &c. as, 
 
 ffc"-*) tL«tf 4iL* ^1 •**""* lit™' 
 
 tH ia ]*Jf 'that which |j» /f^H ' on < 
 
 « This sentence is what he himsflf pronounced.' 
 
 « This affair concerns myself, and not another person.' 
 
to A GRAMMAR OF THE [Op Phohoun*. 
 
 In writing-, tsce g.andAe £1^, are used singly, denoting 'self,' but whe- 
 ther joined to the first, second or third persons, is only discovered from the 
 context. 
 
 J&£ ko'w T jln •— | ke -jr* Orh , frfa . kwei exalts ~n , 
 
 •J^j? keeps back /V men £lx himself, jjf) an J Sf (other) yhKrfu) The 
 
 ~^ *~* { prince- 
 
 til himself. (,) ffi] and ^ advances ^'dTase, J^ men ~^ "" ' ™™ } 
 
 4 A good man honours others, and abases himself, promotes others, and himself 
 keeps back.' 
 
 •jjjl!& u Agr° j-f ki -£> m 
 
 /Jlgptopticty.(5) -'J^ return to L_i self and jf^ Subdue 
 
 'Subdue self, and return to propriety.' 
 
 w*> ** -in- wS ^ * =tfj tUng *x Sd 
 
 ziy\. to deceive JJJ- not j^^ motive P/i\f making sincere YJ\ What 
 
 |- £, *«* -fr> chdy ■ JfJ* ke ^ttt vet 
 
 ffifj V»3 (3) ^ himself ^^J that (is) ^- his pjiji. called 
 
 ' That which is called ' making sincere the motive' is, not to deceive oneself.' 
 Ke ^, with the third person singular preceding, is used for hia. 
 
 ^y child. CI*, his Jg£ love. ^jQh He 
 
 * He loves his son.' 
 
 ii"S ^t is often used for his, hers, theirs. 
 
 — ^p morals. (3) -^J^J- preserve "J - ' children ^X. to teach /\. Man 
 
 ^ their jy to ^ ki. ^' 
 
 ought 
 
 (1) «V- j^ W || («) yd . |E U. =$• (3) cW. ^ kin, j^ <«? ^ «» H 
 
Postante.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. #7 
 
 *A man should teach his children to preserve their morals.' 
 
 "I**" 4A.J*" ^3- 3^ ***• .T wit*..- 
 
 -«- his <AL corers >G ***•■) T3~ goodness • 1^ little mean 
 
 ^* ^^ '" (the good ^ * 
 
 -_*^» _£ irk Vfcsd p« Ufa 
 
 X|\not HI! and F/l that which J/f J at leisure 
 
 Tgh good i3C af * er *l"^ not /PI dwc "' n ? 
 
 |||| and /[^\ secrfts W"M«lf — 1~ advances to /faty practises 
 
 "J\\^ indeed— ^/L* 6t>tin g •* / l "V not 
 
 •M 
 
 publishes "J^V indeed— >Mj » ct '°g 
 
 « The worthless person living in retirement commits every species of wickedness: 
 there is nothing of which he is not capable ; when he sees the good men he secrets 
 himself, or conceals his wickedness and exhibits his goodness.' 
 
 £ \ft is ako nsed fur his and their. Thus 
 
 Jhf, l yly _|^ UlI -4-*- Ttcl 
 
 "j/ 1 bis ' one Zfi, to come (and) %% Now (I) 
 
 r-T. «**■> - 1 ■ poen Aik '"*9 ^ «*» 
 
 ~~J" band XJX^s.^iH) /| pf borrow ^g have sent 
 
 ^*flfc r«f IcS-^" -iyr **•»' ringed -|-£ 
 
 *jy|* to bring ^f| troablc (yw) ^*- instrnmrnt ht*. K "» ) 
 
 : Alin 
 
 [BIS. ^S£«t*#& #«■ * 
 
 «I have now sent Alin to borrow a mu-ic-book; I'll trouble yon to give it into his 
 hand to bring it back with him.' 
 
 In information lodged against thieves it is said 
 (0 ha. <*.' n -£ 
 
9* A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Pronouns. 
 
 jJy +XL. i k miw »-H jt ■ If . Miw On 
 
 one (A th *' ir A acer,ain H dav . -^Jj^ a certain 
 
 yj*U rheit. JfJU srlzin S and J»^S place: // T : J there wrre ^ ' f ' yeaf 
 
 -^* carrying off 'J* "™* ~\ jf^C'*^ Jjf^ a certain 
 
 /la mean y/ I thieve. 
 
 . clothes 
 
 ^C ^cclved 3*lJ came to ~^C 
 
 1 On a certain day of such a month, in a certain year, thieves came to such a place, 
 and by them your petitioner was robbed of a chest of clothes.' 
 
 In speaking of relations, country, place of abode, &c. it is considered vul- 
 gar to use ft my/ or, ' your.' Thus 
 
 "S mother »|% Gb } 
 
 ' My mother.' 
 
 ^relation ftft «» " 
 
 ' Your father,' 
 
 Phrases perfectly intelligible — are rarely made use of by the poorest per- 
 son : they say for ' my mother.' 
 
 #mot ^. 1 
 
 mother; ^\^ ] 
 
 For ' your father' 
 
 Kri 
 
 Family 
 
Possessive.} 
 
 CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 ■ j"T* . honourable. ■ / ff Commanding 
 
 op 
 
 Or 
 
 Or 
 
 A-' *i 
 
 yfe 
 
 stern, i 
 
 if.g 
 Commanding 
 
 Honourable 
 
 T.fla 
 
 Honourable 
 
 ^f prince, Ac ^L 
 
 Honourable 
 
 The words used for ' my* are chiefly ke a $q£, house — family, shay ^, cot- 
 tage, pi $fo, mean — vile, tsedn JU|, cheap, worthless, seaoh ijx, little. 
 
 Those made use of for 'your* are fcuei -jg', noble, ling /fc> commanding, 
 kaou j|J, high — exalted, tsun ^, honourable. Thus 
 
 ' My father.' ' My relation. 
 
 "%'"■ ^ 
 
 * My rider brother.' 
 'My younger.' 
 
 ' Your mother.' 
 
 .\l^ ting JK 
 
 Jg. temple- ^ff *** 
 
 o, 
 
 St*. &Z. -jr"* 
 
100 A GRAMMAR 
 
 * Your elder brother.' 
 . * Your younger brother.' 
 
 %* ^— 
 
 ' Your relation.' 
 ' My wife.' 
 Or 
 
 Hfc" 
 
 rV' 
 
 within, inner. 
 
 Or 
 
 N<ty 
 
 A* ft 
 
 ffj thorn. ^[{{ R* u j e 
 
 rli SM * 
 
 JJLJ Mountain 
 
 wife. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 ' Your wife 
 
 — r* clung op 
 I n right, just, &c, 
 
 Or 
 
 ■•* 
 
 uv 
 
 OF THE [O* Peonouns 
 
 |8f Srt'huold. 3^ T * H 
 
 1 Your family.' 
 Xpp" family, -^» 
 
 &C. 
 
 ' My country. 
 
 (iff to* ^ 
 
 My place of abode.' 
 ft* 
 
 place. 
 
 ' Your country.' 
 
 kwi 
 
 nation. 
 
 Your village.' 
 
 'My sur-nanie.' 
 
 ' My name.' 
 • Your sur-nanie.' 
 
 Sh'ng 
 Abundant 
 
 «■ 
 
 * 
 
Possessive.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 ■ Your name.' 
 
 o 
 
 * Your name and sur-name.' 
 • My scholar.' 
 Or 
 
 -^t disciple. | | door Jf^C 
 
 101 
 
 Your scholar.' 
 
 Xi'W 
 
 ' My servant.' 
 
 Or 
 
 1 Your servant.' 
 4 My friend.' 
 
 2tSL #« 
 
 4 Your friend.' 
 
 ' My house.* 
 J> below : inferior, j*^ Cottag* 
 
 Or 
 
 'jt^ colUgc. - f * S> tri » w 
 
 < Your house.' 
 _r. above, superior. /f»J Palace 
 
 Or 
 
 •Your boy.' ' 
 ' My boy.' 
 
 Or 
 
 
 Your girl. 
 
 (»■•-. thou- 
 
 •^^ gold, I Mod (pieces) -^J BiT 
 &C. &C. 
 
102 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Pronouns. 
 
 The Interrogative 
 
 Pronouns who ? which ? what ? are made by suy =^£, who ? or shd afa, who ? 
 which? hv 'ftj, who? which? what? shin mfi %g ^, what ? she no. yay 
 — '^rf> & ' 8 which one? Thus suy iaeJjfc^fe, 'who comes?' Shi suy 
 lifa J]k> ' wno > s ' l ? ' 
 
 ^V"™' jH/N) ' one ^|>what ^g I, 
 
 ' What person is it ?' 
 
 ' basket. 
 
 ^ '-te™ ^- 
 
 Which basket?' 
 
 J T r lnm j^j- obstructing ^J^y ca 
 
 M 
 Wfco 
 
 Who can stop him ?' 
 
 1 What person ? who ?' 
 
 m 
 
 What 
 
 m 
 
 cause? J l What 
 
 ' What cause ? why 
 
 Sy\ not JAJ cause pjgf the words pfc «A«* J ^Xk 
 
 Vsaid 
 
 ■^Cltt.BdtO>>fwI*wh.« fay,* ^'» 3 J*Jf 
 
 those which 
 
 Why did you not attend to what L said 
 
Interrogative.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 103 
 
 What affair. 
 
 D and ~pa *»'« 
 
 5 
 
 reason and ~ pC **'"V 
 
 1 What 
 
 1 What is the reason ?' 
 
 Whose ? is made by suy Ui $J g§£, whom pertaining to ? As 
 
 Vthinf 
 
 Whose is this thing.' 
 
 01 
 
 «. e. « Who is right ?' 
 In some parts of the empire and in some works shay mH )§* j[, what? 
 is used for ' who ) what ? which ? ' 
 
 St*. *- '■ 
 
 ' By what means V 
 
K>4 A GUAM MAR OF T tt E [Of PnoNonxi. 
 
 The De?nonstrative 
 
 Pronouns are J ' Thif,' che 3ft, this, see $j, this, tsel #£, this. ' That,' 
 na #|S, that, jie ?$, that, t'l ^. that. 
 
 Or 
 
 —J— character. |IE| (N.) • z*Q, This 
 
 1 This character.' 
 
 — J-* character. J^-Q This 
 
 ' That dog.' 
 
 /V man. 'Jg£ 
 
 ' That man.' 
 
 That 
 
 7* 
 
 That 
 
 house. I tf] (N.) "^ That 
 
 'That house.' 
 The plural ' these* is 
 
 Che 
 
 ?Q, This j -^ cm ^^ ca 
 
 ?U> ™» ] ^ This) 
 
 These. . ? These. \ These. 
 
 Those' is made hy 
 
Demonstrative.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 103 
 
 7V* Ttat J xm =ft\7 *'* -v 
 
 w 
 
 (N.) 
 
 f Those. 
 
 species. 
 
 Those. 
 
 _^CA? ^ 
 
 ^te» 
 1 These tea cups.' 
 
 H 
 
 rai 
 
 ♦Those umbrellas.' 
 
 VThese 
 
 ' These things.' 
 
 jP^ f$, Are* $£, S ty, appear sometimes as demonstratives, either singular 
 or plural according to the scope of the passage. She £fc, the substantive verb, 
 is used for ' this' when it refers to any person, thing, or subject immediately 
 preceding. Pi %£, that or those, tse't jf£, this or these, are frequently used 
 together for « that and this,' 'those and these.' As in English ' that' refers to 
 the first mentioned, ' this' to the last mentioned. 
 
 N 
 
100 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Pbonouns. 
 
 The Relative 
 Pronouns 'who, which, and that,' are made hy so ffi, preceding the verb, 
 or chay ^, closing the member of the sentence. Thus, 
 • The man is happy who lives virtuously.' 
 
 ^ ' tSe* " -£=; yti ^ c '" Jy ^ shr " ^ " Ug 
 
 ■$%£ '■ /HP' 1,a PP' De8> /pj >>a» -^J be who -Q- goodness /\ \ Practise* 
 
 The same may be rendered 
 
 ^ I ^f hM iC, who 2 
 
 /''W happiness /\. the 
 
 In which c/^2 appears to form the relative ' who.' 
 
 'He is a real friend who faithfully assists in the time of adversity,' is thus 
 rendered: 
 
 ' *") /7iTy i8 JO '"'thfully >C, of* a^i. Meeting 
 
 v friend. 
 
 Ohf 
 
 Practises 
 
 i 1 p^ ' goodness 
 
 M. *" ^ jj| a"!n,e and J^T ^t P^ 
 
 jB| real ^| he who /^\ 
 
 <listrcssing 
 
 ye* rfj sei 
 
 has (does) •=-&• affairs 
 
 ' He or they who come to this place.' 
 
 chi 9 *&<>>'* \\p t8t ' ^r>\\ taoa •xbc LaS 
 
 he or they who. jjpQ place yXx «"» dt'J to ^J^. Come 
 
 Or 
 
 In) 
 
 place. Jltl this jjil] to ^?V come Jfjjf Wh 
 
rulathe.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Or vulgarly, 
 
 J those 
 1 The tilings which I wanted.* 
 
 f thing. 
 
 'He who learns.' 
 
 107 
 
 A tk *9 jm, ir«o 
 
 it be who. -=j^ Learns 
 
 Vulgarly, 
 
 A*., pip-, Ur?, 
 
 S that 
 
 'Whoever' is rendered by 
 
 yj^ who or which. J\x All 
 
 Thus 
 
 I*, % |^ af. =, #. r. ^ *e«* ,«. ra« 
 
 £X. a rirtooas jjj|. diligently 'tf/f moat ^?V iutercourse p\^ All 
 
 /X*. fritnd. I^ choose m fFi . anitably '33~tT amusement JT/| who 
 
 'Whoever would have an associate, must attentively choose a virtuous friend.' 
 
 ■ad 5^_ gireand 3 L-tT moreoTer 'J J* utensils* ^\ buy and /Is All 
 
 "^P* etenly. Jt?/ i»cba Di{ c ^| should ^? things jpf sell J^/j" those wl 
 
 ' Whoever Lujs and sells, should make a point of dealing justly.' 
 K 3 
 
108 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Phonouns. 
 
 ' Whatever' is also made by 'fan so :' As 
 tK pil -fcp AI -V M -fefe- kuet ifr Fin 
 
 £[_>, must be -^r^» t'H'ir /£_, the J^ valuable and /T^ All 
 
 fll Wgh. ^^ pncc ^(^ thing, Jit heavy JgJ| which arc 
 
 ' Whatever articles are valuable, their price must be high.' 
 
 The Distributive 
 Pronoun 'each' is made by met £j : , each. Thus 
 
 ft doL. W £ve 4tfj] (N.) 4S "ach 
 
 one /\. man " 
 
 ' Every' by &0 ^: as, to Aea'ngr jpf fe, ' every sort.' ' In every way, 
 is thus rendered : pi pwan $£ ]|f, ' a hundred ways.' 
 
 * Every way it amounts to the same thing.' 
 
 jk£' ing *** _M.' W ^fr' * Jk&''" s * -2? pl 
 
 Sfiji manner. one jj^ are <fj\\ all JtpC way, ^J A hundred 
 
 1 Every business requires attention.' 
 
 ,V .Am t ,ro„ti -gp y«<.6 -£,£, tot --fcy «e* ^ Fd» 
 
 JL? ueatt. «J^ little -^ require ^J> all 4|J affair J\± Every 
 
 ' Every person goes.' 
 
 ^* goci. ^j\ not y^. nun 3H£ No 
 
Distributive] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 100 
 
 ' Every day.' 
 
 y\^ the taint. y\^ Hcaveu or day 
 
 Or 
 
 PJ day. PJ Day 
 
 Either' i« variously rendered. 
 
 1 1 have not seen either of those persons. ' 
 
 Six "* 
 
 #.U ^f@(N.) 
 
 HX. There 
 
 ^Whavc. 
 
 ^\\ not ^/v men 
 
 'Either of them.* 
 
 W"r 
 
 
 h «*' sa 
 
 y» J><* 
 
 -"> £f ^ 
 
 m 3 
 
 Nut 
 
 jf\* whr 1 - 
 
 whicli |i|Hj distinguish 
 
 The tame phrase would also render with propriety — ' any of them.* 
 ' It is neither of them.' 
 
 Z%\ no' f$ ***f ^ 
 
110 A U HAM MA It OF THE [Of Pronouns. 
 
 The Indefinite 
 Pronouns are variously rendered ; the following are a few examples. 
 ' There are some persons whom he delights, but others are not much pleased. 1 
 
 ^£> much -ff\ *» 1 yj\ whom l yj^ There 
 
 V others 
 
 ■tyhlj l.c (docs) J^L Pleases ^pC. (a hoi 
 
 y^\ not 'JfK but <y$l he 2 
 
 'Amongst you there are some wise and virtuous; the others are diligent. 
 
 jgifTe A skin ^Hew ^Yoa 
 
 \ good 
 
 . - /"the others f WISC „ 
 
 illness. #lLe5 ^ ' ^ 
 
 ,»J 
 
 yen 
 have 
 
 ^wy of them.' 
 
 —r^ Poi 
 
 s\\ Not 
 
 one. 
 
 
 ST 
 
Indefinite] CHINESE LANGUAGE: 
 
 ' Any person.' 
 
 Or thu» 
 
 kei con- 
 fined to 
 
 /\. man. -j/t "* ) Z\\ 
 
 'what 
 
 c All are present.' 
 Or 
 
 ''ffc are present 7|}K» «"o!e * One 
 
 1 The passions of men are such that their hearts are never at re-it.' 
 
 J^tl ""»• >S» «« ^ h» -"f> not ^g all yV Man's 
 
 J" 4 J£fc\ '»W 3J4, d"* ylrn" r015 y. »**■ 
 
 licart 
 
 ^fl a, Jpj |.»»ion S H/J moTc 4ffi not ^Q 
 
 'Such a man as this.' 
 
 man. Jj^j of / / {^ manner Zt£±, Thi» 
 
 ' One should know his own mind.' 
 
 ^t 1 ! what. ^, themindt "j "if -jH. fully ^| ought /V >' 
 
 ' None that go in to her, return again.' 
 rff. «**F ilJ «* Ant roi -*/ <*' -*-A ** rj-<l/ '•« 
 
 -'|2f llio*c«lio.5l*<, rtturo Jilt not /^, of 2 /^ to -^ f|> all Mint) 
 
 i[U* »uouldand 
 
IIJ A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Phonouns, &c 
 
 < A disposition to respect the aged and pity the poor is possessed by all men.' 
 
 \heart. ^ 
 
 'tH "*' >S this £f aU ^ the poor sfc 
 
 the aged 
 
 The monev, letter, pencils, ink, &c. which were sent have all been received.' 
 
 ji 
 
 — | i ^& t,-,«g >~ ,, n j_- Fa6 
 
 y V entered \ k have ^f- & c . "J=j i e ;tcr 'JsJ Send 
 
 5*C • 'nF obtained "fift thing, fft pencil, ^C clme 
 
 *\K received ^^ all Tgg^ iuk ffcj<. money 
 
C 11J N JSS E L A N G£ A G E. U3 
 
 THE VERB 
 
 Is Ly the Chinese called sang isct iy? ££, ' a living word/ in conlradis- 
 linction from the Noun, which they call see tset ^ 7fc, ' a dead word.' (1) 
 
 The verb remains the same through every person in both numbers. 
 
 The Modes and Tenses are made by auxiliary words, the application 
 of which we shall illustrate by examples : and first of the verb To Have. 
 
 To Have is expressed by the character yeu ^f . 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Singular. 
 
 3#. ''":•,. *#tL igfc 
 
 ypj hath or baa. /f\ bast. /f\ 
 
 have. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ' Tbt y : Yc or yon \ Wr 
 
 fJ-» ffJ-J ^-i 
 
 /pj bav*. /pj bavr. /p| ha»e. 
 
 (1) The vttb It aUo drnomiuakd ting tnt J& J^r, '» moving word,' and thr Nonn titng del 
 *ij£ ffi, • • quince nt word.' O 
 
114 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Verb,-. 
 
 ' I have a book.' 
 
 ^U. 'hod _J_ pue» ySy — *-+ yet _*K, Gi 
 
 *f§f book. S\*- (N.) one Sffl have *£% I 
 
 ' You have a great deal of cotton.' 
 
 Vol. 
 
 have 
 very 
 
 V cotton. 
 
 'He has a chest of opium.' 
 
 iS!* 4 > fnl ^He 
 
 tf»'- 5 ass 3?£ 
 
 Interrogatively 
 
 • What have you to sell J' 
 
 — ^^ -^^ ' —hot • 
 
 Yoo 
 -what 
 
 thing, *-» 
 
 ' Have you a pair of tongs J' 
 y^have- ^iron ■ ^ have J^ Yon, 
 
 TjW qE( N 
 
 ) 
 
ToHme.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 115 
 
 { Have jou not a tea pot V 
 ^T 1 3fctl ^'" j^Yon 
 
 
 \ HOt 
 
 ' Say positively, have you that thing or not ?' 
 
 3r£. ;*•**, ^- ft;- #?- 
 
 > thing 
 
 15-' Mt, #es. jgf-^ 
 «ti #£ ^i ^t'- J 
 
 really 
 
 Or 
 
 Or 
 
 
 Jmperftct Tente. 
 
 
 . 'Iliad.' 
 
 /£J had. 
 
 H>J* time y\^ before «g}£ I 
 
 ^fhad. 
 
 Hvp time f}f J prior ^j^ I 
 
 ^f J i l . • 
 
 £J[J before Y/>L fo,loiriii B ^ I 
 
 Aa the verb, and the signs of the Tense are the same through every per- 
 son, in both numbers, it is unnecessary to write them down at full length. 
 •Thou hadst,' is M sien she yeu ; ' He had/ la siBn she yeit. 
 
 • Betide theae indeterminate ekpreuiona, they My, go Ivii king jti /^ j^\ =^| 5p£, ' I had just now, ' 
 at in Uie firtore, gi lUw yei zfe /j$ ^, ' I M»n »oon have.' 
 
l.'fi A GRAMMAR OF T II E [Of Verbs. 
 
 'I had a European picture which I have now lost.' 
 
 7 lead A. *?" ^ '*"* ~i=t 
 have. -^f preseut ^=p ocean //-J 
 
 Aic4 yiJy _/fc. '''' , 
 
 picture ' one ,/ 1 \ before 
 
 M 
 
 time 
 
 it- =fS if-gf-> H# 
 
 ' He had a whetstone.' 
 
 k*vS —y-. thi fife mi _W. fce?« ■ 1 1 T* 
 
 IN.) xfj stone ££?">>» f}|] before <fo£ 'He 
 
 following 
 
 J\ knife TfJ had j/^. 
 
 1 They formerly had some large rope.' 
 
 J- ropes.* 
 
 .J ^?pQ a few XL* bctorc 
 
 ftft (N.) Hvf time 
 
 Interrogatively 
 
 ' Had you before:' 
 
 JMj- f ^J hid 7^; before tff> Y ! 
 
 They 
 
 • If a determinate time be mentioned, the usual signs of the tense are omitted. • He had last year, (Si 
 thing nUn yo) ^ ^L J- ^. ' I bad this morning,' (Si kin ttai yeO ^r J|'. ^ ;f£. « I had yester- 
 day,' Gi M (<*• y«» % ^ H }; ££• 
 
To Hate.] 
 
 CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 117 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 * I have had.' 
 
 Jjjp* pist. -^J had 7J^ eoiic by Llk »!«ady ^ r 
 
 Or 
 
 Ot 
 
 ® k - ^fH ^ 
 
 5g M Tfif* 1 IS"" 
 
 They also use, to denote the same time — 
 
 M k,ri ^* a M kins 
 
 And 
 
 1 1 have had a chair for some time.' 
 
 ' bad 
 
 [hav« 
 
 #^> f£ ki "' 3 
 
 *st il.iu chair 
 
 Ml 
 
 one 
 
 ^.l.'« 
 
 llllgtll ( f (ilur 
 
113 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [0* V*bbb. 
 
 lie has had several bamboo chairs for along time.' 
 ~ffif chair /^ while fQ& He 
 
 SIS? a®"* &""■' 
 
 >fcf '** SET *»* 
 
 fl bamboe fa J good 
 
 ' They have had a carriage two years.' 
 
 ^ L,c fl3 two -ftf£ T» ) 
 
 . I Tbcy 
 
 nrla 
 years 
 
 had " ?■ Uave 
 
 ;?Bt,..,) •*&«** 
 
 ^7 »- 1 
 
 TOW ^'" a iTa 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 ' //ore you not yet And a wash-hand-stand ?' 
 
 I bad 
 ^Und ^S^ ^."otyet 
 
 jg I [HJ face ^T •««• 
 
 (I) The character ch6ng _fii is used in the same sense as tsnng. 
 
To Bare.-] CHINESE LANGUAGE 
 
 Itf) 
 
 riuperfect Tense. 
 * I had had.' 
 
 jjvx: p ast *3X 
 
 * liad. 
 
 fl|J before 
 
 Or 
 
 T*tng 
 Already 
 
 
 had. 
 
 1 1 had had a. tooth-pick before that time 
 A*. <*e'» gzg kl*g £& G 
 
 -y^r pick Tfgn »»»<» v^u i 
 
 —2 #"> WP 
 
 ■ The Surgeon W ford a silver prolHJ before be came here 
 
 — '" ^ ^k 2w itH w, *1 Hfif Utforc J& pUcc ^" comc ~W 8 | 
 I had 
 
 that 
 
 »i.t 
 time 
 
 The 
 f mirgeon 
 
V20 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Venw. 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 « Had he not had a boat-par before that time ?' 
 
 #£, 5§- #£> 
 
 \ That 
 
 not 
 
 i' 
 
 »*■ 1 >£> '""«■ s(VP hci 
 
 j»r e&o jgn b#-> 
 
 >boat 
 ^.oar J^*"*1 }?JlJ before 
 
 • No ; he had not.' 
 ( had. 
 
 One of the words by which the future is expressed will not answer to 
 our indeterminate future ' I shall have/ but answers to the Greek Paulo- 
 post Future, ' I shall soon have/ or ' I shall have presently.' Thus 
 
 ^pjf have. ^L 
 
 yew -JU|^ ttlw -jj». Go 
 
 shall soon 3Yi I 
 
 • From this, and various other instances, will be manifest the difficulty, if not the impracticability, of 
 translating literally, every character singly, to as to make sense in the connection in which tbey stand in 
 
To Have.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 1*1 
 
 'Any length of time is unnecessary, 1 shall soon have.' 
 
 4 * //< long time ft) [J' /ft Lve ^jrj I 
 
 tsew 
 shall soon 
 
 As • will,' in the first person in both numbers denotes purpose, and 
 'shall,' in the second and third persons denotes necessity, either from a pro- 
 mise or threat, they require a different rendering from 'shall,' in the first 
 person, which merely forete's, and 'will,' in the second and third persons 
 which denote! the sin -. An approximation to the import of '1 will soon 
 have,' may be made in these several way-. 
 
 Or 
 
 Or 
 
 - / ^J have. IfyL. will soon ^{£^ intend (.that I) <•$% 
 
 -4=J «o hare. Wu soon ~5C y " a>t 'QXi 
 
 •^J bare. ^y> must 'fflu soon 'QXk 
 
 ' I will soon have a few arm c!iairs placed in the library.' 
 
 ^t to lie in "^ band 7^ n few 3<" will 
 
 I ' J* tlie book /JpJ chairs ££^ <V) ^C »»« 
 
 f*fo 
 
 1 V n/7/ soon /We some business which I must fequest you to attend to tpeedily 
 
 Set*! *" ztr w " SA to ^ r fb* "' TPi y "" 4 **& G> 
 
 ~J/'X' iu \"' C( " m - /yj"- urgently ppj n ulncM 3^ will £fj£ I 
 
 ^L. fjp£. jjfcSL ^\L $t'%L 
 
12* A G II A M M A It O V THE [Of Vebds. 
 
 ' I tell you in truth, tluit t!uy shall soot* have B saddle ready, to lend to you, Sir, 
 for vout use.' 
 
 flC 'fe $t- #™ #? 
 
 /IJ to use. "^5 ready ^J have ' JfE* to hear J,' ( reality 2 ) 
 
 ;*; Ufa. ri- J ifc- 
 
 **> — £ &£, US 
 
 ' tbrjr 
 
 >Sir 
 
 C" — 
 
 7'Ae Fa/wre T me 
 Is made by tseang }$, about (to be ;) tseang lae^^, about to come, and 
 how $£, afterwards; how lue$< ^ after come. 
 
 • I shall have.' 
 .^J have. /l>f»ball "gjC I 
 
 « We shall not have books, aud of course cannot great'y advance in learning/ 
 
 -V "'"" JtQ M =& * W Xfe" '"' ,ime -=#* Go 
 
 3^, literature. A\\ can jJj books, ^^. ^coining) «jj[l& ~k 
 
 ' We 
 
 y^C U»tly J|'J het»e« ^\ Tt jf^ nbn * 
 
 p(tH enter X|\ not -^M have 7| >J" shall 
 
 ' I am apprehensive that they will have a f >ul wind.'' 
 
 JSLCtaU. -J>lH lo'Let 7^4gl; "(&'* } j^AppTehend(aud) 
 
 i they 
 
To Have.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 123 
 
 'I hope, Sir, that you will have what you wish.* 
 
 *f>£ likes. if^Leart 7ht"' 11 ^E a S cd ) u£ l 
 
 > } ou, Sir, 
 Y J» »J _£__, ?<"> -^ »«.'/ 1 |t/7J «rf«; 
 
 PJ J that which - / pEj have "^ffj lather J ' g hope 
 
 The remarks made above respecting 'shall and will/ apnly in each fu- 
 ture tense. 
 
 1 1 mill have that.' 
 
 necessity <f>£ I 
 
 J- that. 
 
 >!lj- i %£. ^p 
 
 ' Do not be afraid, you shall have that — indeed you shall.' 
 ^J£. suitable . -^ have 4^- aftcr . ^ ^ Not 
 
 / that 
 
 #i»> &::, #;:„ 
 
 When a determinate time is mentioned, the signs of the future arc ge- 
 nerally omitted. 
 
 «I shall lave to-morrow.' 
 
 ^f have. H/-J »'VJ 
 
 ;■ to-morrow 
 
121 A GRAMMAR OF THE [OfVehbs. 
 
 • 'Next year he will have.' 
 
 ^]-J have. J J „,.|| thea ^f^ year 'JaJ bright (next) -fjjf. He 
 
 Interrogatively 
 
 • Will he to-morrow lia> t?' 
 
 •^f have FJq bright 1 
 
 > to-morrow 
 
 /^" or not ? ~]/^ heaven * 
 
 ' Will he have an umbrella the da/after to-morrow ?' 
 
 }£> or not i y^£j have ' ^OL He 
 
 ppj rain A%^. a,ter / 
 
 " ^ dav after 
 
 Jitr " hn . rr- Mn i ,o -" ,orr0W 
 
 ^P- umbrella J/v^ day J 
 1 Will you have this ?' 
 
 f this ? 
 
 tfti 
 
 , this ? 
 
 like 
 
 yeH 
 to have 
 
 Or 
 
 yvutt 
 
To /J arc.} CHI.NM-SE LANGUAGE. 125 
 
 Second Future Tense. 
 
 ' I shall have had.' 
 
 T Irani. OJpT M -/.» ye* |» £/ <jm»|- ^y^ GJ 
 
 perfected. ^JW past y]Jj have Jp.f shall *£)£ I 
 
 1 I have not any this winter; it is necessary that you wait till next mid-summer, 
 when I think I shall have had some.' 
 
 >»« -, T -. Ui _L at A. Km 
 
 jJCk must ^|> that £j^ coming ^Tv not /^j This 
 
 Hvf time ^^p year <^J have ; yfj£j£ ycar 
 
 ''fet have ^J|] before <£><. summer's ~^$J ""'»* '''•" winter 
 
 ; j]pft past VXk 1 — j-*: utmost ?yk necessarily J^ ~ season 
 
 J perfected. ^^ tliink 0JJ the term ; y j^. wait fiffe altogether 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Lcl me have/ ». e. permit me to have, is 
 
 /J J U have. ^PCt ■« ffT Permit 
 
 Or 
 
 ^J to tare. 5>U ra£ Mi Allow 
 
 ' llavc thoa,' as a command or entreaty, cannot be rendered hut by 
 
 ^J U«»». J*J* thou l /A.' will (that) 3JI& I 
 
126 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Verbs. 
 
 Or 
 
 Sp$ to have. (ij^yoo ^^ order 'OXi l 
 
 As an entreaty 
 
 ^ffohave. ''j if you j£g wish 3^1 
 
 Or 
 
 ^fj to have. / f*J*yoo Jf|// exhort WC l 
 
 'Have rati, nee.' 
 
 > patience 3 
 
 kfc£« "iiiiH ffl: 
 
 ' Let (or permit) him (to) have.' 
 ^fet to have, 'f tffj. Mm tfy Permit 
 
 ' Let us have' 
 ' / fet to have £f |~ Permit 
 
 Let u<? have gratitude,' as an exhortation in the first person plural. 
 
 «L7 llcart - j\2» favour ;— -^f have ffy* immediately rffc Gi 1 
 
 ! v 
 
 -?* ^ ski? '""'' fc£*' /\K\mln) 
 
 J C r the =p|^ to rccompeme_LL t UoulJ jj J 
 
ToUaet.-] CHINESE LANGUAGE. ™ 
 
 \ You 
 
 ' Have ye, or do ve have.' 
 
 Or 
 
 B[j instantly >f^ »* ^ ^ ," 
 
 1 >0U / • 
 
 Let them have. 
 
 ^ L'Le. ffr 
 
 Hermit 
 
 #' S > 
 
 tfacm 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 ' I may have.' 
 
 "FT 
 
 £1 
 
 .r 
 
128 A GRAMMAR OF THE [OfV^i- 
 
 ( 
 
 -fa 9 * 
 
 /pj have. 
 
 I can have.' 
 
 aft? 
 
 
 
 
 4 You may have that when you please.' 
 >tbat Vmay 
 
 ^7 thing. ^pj have ^£ wish 
 
 ' He can have that precious stone.' 
 
 ^Aft paai -^ yei Jt 1% 
 
 J I precious /pij lllVe |tl& Hc 
 
 *1L M" } "^r-j • 
 
 S that V can 
 
 Interrogatively 
 
 c May I have ?' 
 Spl have 515 x 
 
To JIaxe.] CHJ N E S E L A N (J U A GE. 1 - 
 
 ' How can he not have a master to teach him 5' 
 
 ; a master . can 
 
 /4^$C lo teach ^pj have Xj \ not 
 
 Imperfect Tense. * 
 
 ' I might have.' 
 
 'Seven months ago I might hate bought several houses.' 
 mm Mb can mui m y»< ,->n. c.» 
 
 |ft| (N-) ^bought ytj moons ^J^ I 
 
 ^^ rooms r J J ^ ^ yf£ before 
 
 \might 
 
 j=! » rv? ( _r «' 
 
 /hP houses Jr^ * ~Ll seTcn 
 
 ^4r 1t4 / i yei Atfl '''* 
 
 "AX^ several ,^pl have 
 
 (.N.) 
 
 ' You could have.' 
 « Last rear you could have bought ten Mow of land at 30 tales per Mow. 
 
 13ij t'ale* ^ Z* T^j have 'f if You 
 
 _1.JL Jtfow fcnl W | thing 
 
 |I|A. Mow ^f=| bought I*. above 
 
 war 
 
 ilirir« |~" ten "J *' ^ 
 
 I miylit 
 
UNIVERSITY 
 
 130 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 [Op Vkrbs. 
 
 ' I would/ denoting purpose, 
 If J Iiad known thai affair yesterday, 1 xould hate come and consulted with you. 
 
 , /pj have 
 
 >that 
 
 ,-*tH •» 
 
 ^ if 
 
 ^T*V come 
 
 /^ keVn J 
 
 
 
 V affair 
 |j*| Ling) 
 
 
 
 consult. 
 
 Kit WB 
 
 J^N instantly 
 
 1^1 had 
 
 
 "3?" won Id 
 
 jOt"*'' 
 
 'You would/ denoting that which would follow in consequence of some 
 thing mentioned or understood. 
 
 * If you had come yesterday, you would have seen him, for he was here at that 
 time.' 
 
 RE-. WL 
 
 have 
 
 y\± 6ecn 
 
 *- i #;:::„»#,; 
 
 #1" 
 
 7T.il for 
 
 2jv come ^* If 
 
 had 'j'.Pyoo 
 
 Ml 
 
 yesterday 
 
To Have.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. . 131 
 
 1 My Brother was here yesterday ; if you had come you would have seen him.' 
 
 Jt»»c« EJvjf 'time A place ; l^fe ,iJ ) ^ My 
 
 V yestcr- 
 
 J. brother 
 fffij Oh* would '|'J > * you •H^ iu ^rjy " 
 
 ^ have /J]* that ^Q, il.i, ^^ was 
 
 Tiew $£, which above is » iven as forming the Paulo-post future, denotes 
 'presently, hence, of course,' &c. 
 
 'Should,' denoting 'duty, obligation,' &c. 
 
 ' Hitherto yuu should have attended diligently to what (he master said.' 
 
 •the master > UiUierto 
 
 ! 
 
 fl^J'- ?J[»UicB ^diUgcntly ^ you 
 
 ^ tr« . ^-j| k,i„ ^ ting pfc pfew 
 
 prb word*. |ip7*- 'poke Jjtl£> heard /<e> »liould and 
 
 '1 should have,' denoting that which follows of course. 
 « If I had heard sooner of that a flair, J thould haie gene to assist thcui. 
 
 ^rflr to »«• «nd ^IK» I -MlS* heard '/fa' 1» 
 
 it//::,-, jijji,.,,,,. pfl,-) &•,• 
 
 #*. #r* *- 
 
 •^ June -J ^ affair; -^J- »oon 
 
 :i ^ 
 
 as 
 
132 
 
 A GRA M M A It OF T II E [Or * S* bs. 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 ' How might 1 not have obtained profit yesterday ?' 
 
 > yesterday 
 -f^p obtained y^ TA now (*> 
 
 {.profit v might t not 
 
 How could he have ability to perform it well I 
 
 could "fffJi He 
 
 * ^ (well l«°P e r- {ability 
 
 ■£-* #"' *-> *- # 
 
 « If he had before asked you to do it, would you have gone and done it?* 
 ^Jwl "f^^old ^fy'cm *g.7reTdy >(tt If 
 
 ^ go" ^ if! to" do (it) T^f Ld ftfe. he 
 
 Pf- and do it 7^ 5 ou @H requested ^L, before 
 
 hra 
 
ToHcne.-] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 133 
 
 Ifhe had adopted this mode of acting, zoould it not have been better.' 
 
 ffi'" ffc^ 
 
 Z 0S' 
 
 Iff ying 
 
 /IJ used 
 
 
 /fi^bfen 
 
 *zk rnle 
 
 
 #2 
 
 ^.more 
 
 ^"•?«* 
 
 1 'jr^C manner 
 
 At-. '«» 
 
 >I , before 
 
 #£ 
 
 . i it nol 
 
 t^ 
 
 /pj bad 
 
 ' Should he not have acted thus ?' 
 
 7£i» Xpj totaave '^He 
 
 acted, 
 
 s'v 
 
 If I had come yesterday, should I not have seen him ?' 
 JjjyL then ^fs. came, yfj If 
 
 not I ywtcrday 
 
 5 H 
 
1*4 
 
 A QUA M M A It O F T II E [Of V*<ibs. 
 
 Per/erf Tewe. 
 ' I may or can have had.' 
 
 I do not remember fully ; I may have had— but it is uncertain:' 
 
 Gi 
 
 f V had : !• "•"">• I 
 
 3&*-i >gw ^SE-^ 3fcL 
 
 "^~ ' * alrea- 
 
 Or 
 
 'I may have had 
 AM 
 
 > have had. % before }• Perhaps 
 
 PJU 
 
 J 
 
 already •^J^ I 
 
 ' That thing is what he cannot have had.' 
 
 ^.already £ That 
 
 H?"*) jjjfi,** #.«■' 
 
 -r& toi > 
 
 thing 
 
 ' have had 
 
 HE 
 
IS5 
 
 To Box.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 • Why can he not have had that :' 
 
 4 ""' »-* £ not 
 
 #'"- > -ff-i ^-i fji, 
 
 \ have had 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 * I might could, would, or should have had.' 
 Two years ago J might have had several silver soup- spoons 
 
 » * ■ Tteln 
 hare bad 
 
 H2L ^-i V'O Wf- 
 
 'When your father was alive, you could have had a very pleasant place to live 
 i.' 
 
 fefc" } #"1 #t ^'^ } 
 
 J place [obtained J- Vonr f.ther 
 
 , could 
 
 «■-, #F £-<-, tig -' # 
 
 [to dwell (in.) * NUi » 
 
 /Mill 
 
136 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Vebbs. 
 
 ' The month before last I could have had bought a great quantity of tea, but I 
 did not then know what your determination was.' 
 
 the former 
 
 \ what. > deal of 
 
 >know 
 
 M- J $£ Iff "*» 
 
 'TvF 1 ^f^- leaf, ^J moon 
 
 #*«< mz ."^r- 1 
 
 > could 
 
 fc 
 
 I J 
 
 < urination . ,/,< f^j 
 
 Hvf time ^^ »»<" ^ 
 
 sf\ not J 
 
 bought 
 
 ' If at that time he had had more knowledge, he would not have had behaved iu 
 this manner.' 
 
 jfifi maimer S\\ poi 1 "fvf pos.essed -ftf^ he ^j* If 
 
 Vnot 
 
 ft? ;!-> jl-k»..®'"> *&~ 
 
 > ledge / raorc 
 
 fS"'-'X #E» rill'"' ^ 5 NT'S 
 
 i b f ua - . i tim 
 
ToHate.-} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 137 
 
 1 Before he fell down, you should have had (old him to be careful ; that he was not 
 permitted to go np hastily.' 
 
 J should 
 A* fcrfin , f 1*I£, ,. I T> ehe _|^ u>* 
 
 5t *r ;$ -• » ^ 'isi, yt su -t £ 
 
 . i »p ^i HT t $8 tou 4 *r - vou -^ f « ,ien 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 ' If before that time he had pleased to act thus, why could he not have had done it:' 
 
 3c go jg. how ^f ,o have sj=i if 7Tr Th,t 
 
 > might 
 
 Or 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 ' If I had.' 
 
 -^ k..,. 3£ i ;£? ir 
 
 sfrdL &;' mi! 
 
138 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Veubs. 
 
 1 If thou have.' 
 -'JSJ havc,&c. ^J\p thon "/£f If 
 
 The same in every person in both numbers. 
 
 ' Ifl/ ou ' iare a few 
 
 articles, you had better sell them, for 
 
 the price is now verj 
 
 kigh.' 
 
 
 
 
 Vthc 
 
 r—f huo* 
 
 TvJ"* good 
 price (is'* 
 
 tef y~"> 
 
 [/ v | botaOM 
 
 J|^ articles 
 _J=T to sell 
 
 
 f tut 
 ySX very 
 
 ""££ ka " a 
 J«J higb. 
 
 >at pre>cnl 
 
 ..1. kei. 
 
 "2C out (") 
 
 y^, more 
 
 n Jr. . vei 
 /^\ have 
 
 — *. a few 
 
 Jmperftcl Tense. 
 1 If I formerly had that thing, it is now lost.' 
 
 > already is >that 
 
 3*c« a * ■> ill fl, o $£'*»*) 
 
 Slost. /thing, >b 
 
 K" ^ 
 
 bad 
 
To Have.-] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 139 
 
 'If I bad, I would soon lend to you — What is there to hinder ?' 
 
 f/J obstacle (in) / JAT > ou • «!/£» then soon 'W Jf 
 
 5ft- thing, ^fpj wUat ^|*«» ^jlflud;- 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 'If I have had,' &c. 
 Jfhe hare had that in his house, why did he not mention it V 
 
 £f v ^Chouse lathis Sfa If 
 
 ' thine; 
 
 already 
 
 >fC not t~ > 
 
 
 ' Ifyo* hate had this for some time, why did you not let me know V 
 
 r ^/i, ^-i, ^i, jgs 
 
 J- this 
 
 V to know. !.i\elia<f * a li 
 
140 A G It A M M A It O F T HE [Of Vtims. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 ' If I had had,' &c. 
 
 ' If before you came, 1 had had the thing which you wanted, I must have present- 
 ed it to you.' 
 
 TK on 3% ' iSl^' ftlj before jjjf £ 
 
 $kZL ^ thing ^f -f^ 
 
 ■J 
 
 ' > oil 
 
 came 
 
 Shad 
 
 ^S» £1. jg*-* ^^, 
 
 ^jMJea(itto) ^JA- wanted, -^J had /^ the 
 
 Paulo-post Future. 
 If I shall soon have.' 
 
 . y«i -Jbfc. tt * w rt f^ gi -fit ■ ./» 
 
 /^=J have. i^/L shall soon »Jj^ I 
 
 If 
 
 /Vrit Future. 
 « If I shall have.' 
 'If, next year, I shall have a few things to sell, I shall inform you. 
 
 (jEJ. to hear. ^JXi I -^J have yfcj If 
 
 -i.fc. r««> jJLI* sii <= ^K fd 
 
 shall !^v a few <cfK I 
 
 ft 
 
 > inform Varticle* '. 
 
 next year 
 
 §jt i»tang 
 \\ shall 
 
IV £/««.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. Ml 
 
 'If I shall have tea, I must present a chest to you.' 
 
 pjlh lT *£, present ^S l "W h * vc ^S If 
 
 jo«. ' > i yJ must yf^- tea 3% I 
 
 Second Future. 
 
 <IfI shall have had.' 
 
 « Wait till December next year : if before that time J shall hare had, when you come 
 I will let you know.' 
 
 ^you 3flJ arri.cd, ^fL"oon; ^ Ti ^) Wtit 
 
 ^ >oo 2f£ come ^ I 
 
 t till 
 
 '«« .=*fe.*» -&£;' "fcb,„.« J 
 
 if 
 
 tai 
 
 next 
 
 ^l*l» B#'«". W^* ffi>'«*< *M 
 
 & 
 
 pa 
 
 7~> *- — 
 
 lea 
 
 
148 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Vehes. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE MOOD*, 
 
 Is expressed by the simple character yeii ^ to have : As, 
 ' I love to have.' 
 
 - jtt W* j Trtt teal •=£& Gi 
 
 /|2J to have. jf£j£ love *£!& I 
 
 'To have,' beginning' a sentence, is expressed by e yeu-fe t>7, to have, 
 as, 
 
 '7b hate a great abundance of wealth, and not impart any to the poor, aged 
 man — How is that goodness ?' 
 
 J\~ people I ^ ''""* } 'W »» w 
 
 > never 
 
 ;gl ^ J Jft-.i 
 
 yjyjty constitute J,;^7 impart 
 F4 goodness *7'J « to w" 
 
 31 s / poor 
 
 /taff"! 
 
 THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 ' Having.' 
 * He having a great quantity, shared a little to other persons. 
 
 ^J other ^7"\h««d fffc*'*) 'fife He 
 
 ' a great * 
 
 hen 
 
 having 
 
 tfa** Hrt w -^'" ,l 
 
 3? 1 ?* to JHJ then ^fij had 
 
 • If the Optative Mood were inserted, it would be rendered by Gt y*.ln ye<\ "^fet £$ ^, «I wish 
 or desire, to have'-and also by a peculiar phrase, Gi pa poi tl yei ^ ^ ^ Q fj|, ' I»topn.tcan 
 to have,' i. *. 'I wish to have.' 
 
ToHait.) CHI NESE LANGUAGE. 143 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 'Had.' 
 
 *&*■*■ ir 
 
 COMPOUND PERFECT. 
 'Having had.' 
 'He herring had a. large fortune, indulged his passions without restraint.' 
 
 fl[ trill (and) X^ original ^f »'» -J ^JJ^ H e 
 
 Vhad 
 
 ^PP irregular ||| property, ^W ** f|j£ ti ^ 
 
 ^de.ire. ^ bulged (hU) ^C Urge -j|f «**' 
 
 Although in conversation, and in detached sentences, the moods and 
 tenses can be expressed determinately, as above, yet, in good composition, 
 which is much more laconic than the spoken language, the signs of the 
 tenses are not so fully employed, but much is left to be gathered from the 
 scope of the passage. And although in some of the above cases, several dif- 
 ferent signs of the same tense are used together, to shew that it may be 
 done, for the sake of greater precision, it is not to be understood always ne- 
 cessary. 
 
Hi A GRAMMAR OF THE [OfVerbs. 
 
 The Substantive Verb ' To Be,' shi ^, is not capable of any combinati- 
 on with other words that will correspond to the several Moods and Tenses 
 of the English Verb. We shall shew by examples how the verb 'to be/ is 
 rendered in Chinese. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 PrcseqjfTense. 
 ' I am,' &c. 
 ' J am an old man.' 
 
 Aj<» -Jfc. laoi ^ M ^t± G» 
 
 man. ^ old XE am V% l 
 
 t You are intelligent.' 
 
 A 
 
 He is a good man.' 
 ^jp a good >n£ " TUa He 
 
 We are poor persons.' 
 
 sht 
 
 K j,H -#- 
 
 J V persons. ^ f^ 
 
 gj * 
 
To Be.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 145 
 
 « They are not proud.' 
 
 f > They 
 
 ♦ Am, art, ir, are/ — are also rendered by hi ffi ; wet ^ ; tsatfe; sk8 J^. 
 ' This « mine.' 
 
 J mine. 
 
 
 %t 
 
 I am come from Fo-keen. 
 
 7lia» 
 
 i-keen 
 fata 
 
 
 front 
 
 He if a good son ; he always loves and respects his father and mother.' 
 
 -tr-i,. #s~ nr^. ^2 ^:-" 
 
146 . A G K A M M A It O 1 T 11 E [Or Vi 
 
 ' The book is here.' 
 
 ^=5. - -r jj - Shoo 
 
 tn «'•? "* s tt' 1'lic took 
 
 > here. , 
 
 ' This affair is greatly in opposition to the prohibitions.' 
 3r*|i opposed to /V*»e»«y ^tj 't'I'U 
 
 rjV the prohibitions. /£& i* I \ x \ a niur 
 
 That w his/ is expressed by 
 
 '.That 
 
 'Am, is/ &c are often included in the adjective or verb. As, 
 
 ' 1 am hungry.' 
 
 4 
 
 My KTXl My 
 
 ^tWy.^ibd, 
 
 He is sorry.' 
 
 #£ 
 
 * is sony. 
 
To Be.-} CHINESE LANGUAGE. I« 
 
 « I am very glad.' 
 
 ' am glad. . 
 
 ^«.t 
 
 very 
 
 parti 
 
 interrogatively, 
 
 1 Am I my brother's keeper *:' 
 
 i J brother 
 
 "T^ r -* ir - '* >foy constituted 
 
 ' Are job not the man who came yesterday ?' 
 
 J&&, #s~ «:- } #vi 
 
 I yesterday 
 /V man J£J| who Xi_ "" 
 
 Affirming strongly is put in the interrogative form ; thus, 
 
 (l)« It it, or i« it Dot? tki pni *\i -^£ Z^ -yjV, i«, not i»? (rencrally follow* thr prnpo»it;<>n with 
 wl.irhitii eonnrrtrd, •*//« ft* -ffi?, 'U it, or uotr' which denotes the fame, cither precede* or folluwa 
 the prepotition connected with it. 
 
 S 3 
 
hot ^1> lul uJ^ -yr^t Vrk 
 
 icsterday 
 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Verbs. 
 
 ^Z «>'« 3^ ' J2* how 
 
 /V "»» J^Jf *h* jf£ not 
 
 ' How are you not the ruan who came yesterday ?' 
 
 SZ/e^'is,' also denotes that which is right , -poo she £^~%\, not is, denote* 
 that which is wrong. 
 
 
 ""jF* poi ~tf * / '*'-' ^ ,hl 
 
 S[\ not ,y^ who 7jr ,, 
 
 i. e. ' Who is right, and who tcrong.' 
 It is said, 
 
 pgis, ^f ^ not -^ Uave ^Xk * 
 
 j. e. ' I ana wrong,' or ' 1 am in fault.' 
 
 Right and wrong are also expressed by she ^ 'is, and/el Jfe, not,' united. 
 
 Tims, 
 
 -tki^ J§\tL fj\ tL which ^ you j^not, ^ 1^ 
 
 f. f. 'You know right from wrong.'(l) 
 
 Shi' fd sometimes occur together, when a pause in reading or speaking 
 is required after she, which alters the sense. Thus 
 
 (l) MvtoJ^jg. 
 
To Be.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 149 
 
 7$1 tU ) S| the shallow ^2- •» ^P °*« ) Chnnc 
 
 \ Lufiwl. S VUDZ i 
 
 CM-V 
 
 } knows, J- )ung v 1 ) 
 
 ,„) m. M ^ f «* 4 1^..,, J 
 
 ClinnC- 
 
 4JJj ''* ^-f^ learned ^W. doctrines 
 
 >tij person 7K are (ct nature 
 
 P/f *hat which ^7 p not «^p, reason 
 
 1. e. < The doctrines of ' ChUng-y&ng, respecting nature and reason, are not under- 
 ttood by the partially learned.' 
 
 ■E|3h business. jc^,. the ^p wi 
 
 rong 7& Right 
 
 And 
 
 ,/V """, 32*. the ^P wro »S XtS- R 
 
 ght 
 
 Are expressions which denote affairs and persons of doubtful, indeterminate 
 character, in which the bad preponderates. It is said, 
 
 |fp and not ~££? u -£| pw»<>n who y£g U £j^. 
 
 man— /pt* an U fcjC- of course ^p not jj^ t 
 
 to* 
 
 Comes 
 
 shtri 
 o speak 
 
 i. e. 'He who comes (busily) saying this (person) is right, and that wrong, is ilia- 
 self a doubtful character.' 
 
 ' J am engaged,' — the Chinese express by go yeu «cJ 2^ ^ ^, ' I have bu- 
 siness.' They say, 
 
 (1) The second of the Si sA«w ~J * TO, or Four book* of Confucius. 
 
150 A GRAMMAR OF THE [OfVebbs. 
 
 J?\j" t'^oil,— Al-i mutually // ffc are yp^f related ^C family ]/C G*«l 
 
 i*. e. ' We are all on good terms.' 
 
 The phrase ' What is he ?' i. e. what occupation — they render by 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 ' I was,' &c. 
 « When I met him, 1 was riding upon the road.' 
 
 JXf ahorse. Jt «pon ^E •*»*«• 3K « ^ * h « ^_L "«« 
 
 jjffi riding |)C^ the road ^jT was fjvj 1 time ffity him 
 
 1 He was here yesterday.' 
 4L was fj|£ He 
 
 Vhcre. >yesterday 
 
 * They were once at Peking.' 
 
 ODe n ti tnc north 3-U S° ,0 } Tlii ^* "I 
 
 J were at ' Thty 
 
 */ V time. Jfify. capital ^|MJ passed 1 1 I 
 
To Be.] CHINESE 'LANGUAGE. '151 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 ' Jt'eret/ou here when he came ?' 
 Jgf? jltiUi* |TiJ with bin Hyftime -f^ He 
 
 j)la<-e 
 
 ^£'".1, #;i *fc 
 
 IVus that affair thus or not 
 
 ta Te A- a 
 
 ^J^not /J^ manner >^t Lave ^p* affair 771'™ ) 
 
 J- That 
 
 ' W ho ocas the person that came this morning V 
 
 y$J n. ^ the J[*Jf who y^* Thb. 
 
 ~*t .My JT j/, ^ /«* ' pi cm* 
 
 HfE wuo ' / V "»»"» -^y>- Ciuue I morninj ' 
 
 • Were not these fruits very good last winter I 1 
 
 J£ H ~T «** ) ^jt *«* ) 1^ til <|§ olj 
 
 J- very \ fruits 
 
 ^- ^* ' =f- -» at-, ' #::^ 
 
 '* B *7 
 vtiuUr 
 
 ' What rrcrc you doing before you came ?' 
 f what? 
 
152 A GRAMMAR OF T II lu [O* V*ai 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 * 1 have been,' &e. 
 ' 1 have been here a long time.' 
 
 shin ~f=r ttai 
 
 -fit very ft. been 3% I 
 
 /^Y longtime. y\S tui » ^Si ) 
 
 n • 
 
 7/e /<as Jeen at England.' 
 
 He 
 
 V ground. 
 
 |g| country ©] 
 
 gone t« 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 « Where have you btcn? 
 
 ^ g o f|>Yo. 
 
 ^fe'.lc. ^ which ^'^> 
 
 J. just 
 
 
ToBe.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 153 
 
 * Hare you been to see who the person is who has come ?' 
 
 3ft come qPj who ^fc 8° "l T Y ° U 
 
 J has? 'one ^^ to enquire ^{| '""^ 
 
 ' h»vr 
 
 Xb ,s 
 
 c Have you been at Keang-she £' 
 VKeang-ahe 
 
 > hate befors 
 
 
 lota 
 
 gone i 
 
 //are ficen,' is often included in the verb : as, 
 c J Afire tc r m reading.' 
 A- W " :5*t> '"' 
 
 -jgf read -Jfc , 
 
 Jtjl]«.<j 
 
 ill-t I 
 
 1 What have you been doing ?' 
 
 «l,at- J. 
 
 just now 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Verbs. 
 
 'Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 1 1 lind been,' &c. 
 
 1 J had been there before he came.' 
 
 ~J\^ before 4(i£ 
 
 us 
 
 come 
 
 7f|* that =#< / MM* time 
 
 Vhad 
 
 Jgj} place, ifgg oJ /O th ' 
 
 Or thus, 
 
 j|u place. Slj*»0 ^ gfef ^not 
 
 c Before that affair was introduced /ic had hem here many years, and knew pret- 
 ty well how to manage business, from fir«t to last.' 
 
 ^P know. ^ many ^ had ^fj paused ^ W ^ 
 
 "fj^hc-ulaml^p "-can; ^t ""' } )j£ to rise up ^ """ ^ 
 
 ^ resided 
 
 M- !#»!,-<■ 5§"> #El, #.!„ 
 
 'J V business ^Q, <* ? } '^ J,e 37j^ not 
 
 V here 
 
 P i- in some ^T tf 1 p| ^ ^ M« 
 
 degree ^g- -7 I i already !£} yet 
 
To Be.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 1 Before he came had you not been thinking about that affair ?' 
 
 Vnot 
 " |o*t 
 
 153 
 
 
 ite: ut T4 i 
 
 gyl'l&itl 1 l al 
 
 ready '\ ij"» you 
 
 Had you not been at Shan-se before last year J' 
 
 tin i r'i-. 
 
 
 > been at 
 
 
 111 - / 
 
 J. Shan-*- 
 
 15" j 
 
 
 Fatore Tense. 
 1 zcill be careful. 
 
 \ V^ *«»«• ^ J** ''"'e /f"fy ">»>»• 4J& ""» l /N" iW and »J^ 
 
. Next year 
 
 156 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Vebbi 
 
 'Next year J shall beat Lo-fow.Ui\V 
 
 V L»-fow 
 
 I 
 
 tteing 
 
 « Kxercise filial piety and respect towards your father and mother, and then .you 
 uill be a good son.' 
 
 J »<>•>• ^foy be P-J- Bother T$£ respectful to ^*\* Yo 
 
 ^T K° X / Ul, ' n wiU /C fi > tlltr -^ L " b. 
 
 A«ao£ 
 dutiful 
 
 4 My mind will be at rest when that affair is fully settled.' 
 >C " st lU^wfr* "2^ g"°e ^pmanaptd /TP M 1 
 
 i clearly 
 ^Jf obtain ^my fe pl 3 ^ Iffair 
 
 ' 1 believe him that it shall be as he has said.' 
 |— | words c^J - affair ^P£ I 
 
 -£ *r* V| ^ J-^ ,h,'n 
 
 \[\\ and "\ iXT "»>*' 1q Mi< 
 
 4M: M I -bu io8 JtU* 
 
 ■^ \y obtain \rome ^H " / HfX him 
 /to pass. 
 
 JfS come 1 J£ be JP^ that 
 
 .U fig ill cfta ,LI> to? 
 
T*Bt.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. IW 
 
 •They vill be victorious.' 
 
 ' i shall be wanting to go abroad.' 
 
 Hi Lgoootto 7^- «**o 
 
 V shall 
 ^jl J" the street. ^ rj " J 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 { Will he not be here to-morrow ?' 
 
 \ here > to-morrow 
 
 ' If he be diligent to-day mill he be permitted to play to-morrow :' 
 ] i Minus itEi llc 
 
 be >flH.I.. 
 
 #1 fl^-o >^^1 
 
 s to-morrow >to 
 
J38 A G R A M MAR O F T II £ [Of Vkii hi. 
 
 Second Future. 
 1 I shall have been.' 
 
 • Reckoning till October next year, 1 shall have been at Ileang-shan eighteen years/ 
 f. . 7y y» f , «m . ^r «' 
 
 | * A * J -' / |5j have ~" J~" tenth ^| Rcckoflin e 
 
 V eighteen 
 
 y\ H J ^j-f- been at /~J moou ^ij till 
 
 VHeaiu'-sli.ui 
 ^length of time. |I| '*""" 3 ^ 'shall ^ 
 
 feu 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Be thou diligent in writing 
 
 tsti i > _ > see 
 
 character. 
 
 k r 1 1 : 1 1 _c 
 
 /) <«li«em ^ Z J([J then ^ 
 
 /.c< him be there. 
 
 I* that ^jfcbe 7tfe"liim l^l-et 
 
 'Let us be attentive.' 
 
 tyi attentively |![l tha 3fe ' 
 
 Jj,fci> listen. JEJ^ shoul(1 /]" J ' 
 
 I" 
 
T«£c] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 159 
 
 Let them be merry . 
 
 rtT Let 
 
 : merry. 
 
 \ be merry. 
 
 them 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 
 Prestnt Tense. 
 * I may be wrong.' 
 
 7ft bave WL l 
 
 |R piled the mark. ^* ** ) 
 
 perhaps 
 cUjr > 
 
 ' He is not a perfect man, he also may be mistaken.' 
 
 #r„„. "pj"? A— -^™' 
 
 TAr^ ca» be hero to-morrow. 
 
 lit:;: fife — * %"" ] fl1~ 
 
 They 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE Of Vkiio*. 
 
 4 It cannot be effected 
 
 > obtainable. 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 Ski 
 Effected 
 
 How can this be the man who came yesterday ?' 
 
 ?ft came jgif be J*Q Thil 
 
 ). yesterday 
 
 A~ ^»* St 
 
 =^r #fl i&ir 
 
 ; Can <n« 6e done or not 
 
 ^cau? >f\not .fj done JJL 
 
 TV? 
 This 
 
 S~* tun; J>f$ tl 
 
 *fj done 'Jm can 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 * Might, could, would, or should be.* 
 
 He might be here yesterday ; I do not know.' 
 
 Vknow. V perhaps 
 
 iML-i ft*. *■?! 
 
 * 
 
 "' yesterday 
 
 <*5 "i 
 
ToBe.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 1GI 
 
 1 If he pleased he could be a good servant.' 
 
 FT *<*>* foi he ^Pl If 
 
 \ servant. J- could 
 
 disposition 
 
 DrM ii^c<i 
 
 « I zcould not 6e troublesome 
 
 *?f dUtress 5)^ I 
 
 person*. 
 
 MB wu 
 
 to trouble and 
 
 * J zcould not be negligent.' 
 > negligent. 
 
 ' You should be diligent that you may have a competence.' 
 
 * am." \yt* ^t^ =&- kai /a? 1 * 
 
 i o»e. / |^J obtain /^J\ tnat TT^T lo •"■a 05 " 1 0^ «"ght J'J"» You 
 
 ^P^ enough 3p£ thereby.' J J- bu.iucw ^f diligiutfy /nyt should and 
 
162 A GRAMMAR OF THE [O? Vehm. 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 ' Could he be here if he pleased V 
 
 ' h«r» \ llV-rrl it 
 
 liked it 
 
 31^ ^EluJt'd'^Mrid ^J w ^L 
 
 CokW he be at Tseen-shan yesterday at 12 o'clock ?' 
 J*l J arrival at Wyf time ■jjf)^ He 
 
 £ Tseen-shan £ could Sycsterday 
 
 'TCr obtain 
 
 I non 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 •May or can have been.' 
 
 ' lie may hate been there formerly ; it is uncertain.' 
 
 ^K not fffi that Pj ** y 'ffy He 
 
 ■ may 
 
 /E certain. ^ place fl[^ "^ ^ '•*») 
 
 iZhaUo Jljheenat |5j 
 
ToBe.] CHI NESE LANGUAGE. 1*3 
 
 5 You cannot have been there and have again returned.' 
 
 4$L »g»iD -f^f « ^ T^p You 
 
 \ been at 
 
 nut 
 
 can 
 
 hare 
 
 
 l J iuperfecl Tense. 
 1 Might have been,' &c. 
 4 They should have been here before.' 
 
 y\l « hij JeL ' no " 1 '* /Xl bcfore TU& ** ) 
 
 jj&*L. ^ iat been ^;1 fl"I 
 
 ' He n»'gA< force teen there tlie day before yesterday.' 
 
 ' * { have been 
 
 >day before yesterday 
 
 
 'miul.t 
 
161 A GRAMMAR OF TH E [0# Tbub». 
 
 'If he had set off yesterday morning at day-light, he would have been there in the 
 evening.' 
 
 yJ'P that J~J IJ could / JjL waiting till ^^ clear ]^£j If 
 
 J^Qt place - / |5j have H% evening -^p- morning -^{f^ lie 
 
 -fff obtained _Jl npoT 7t£ r ° se ^ P " 5 ) 
 
 > yesterday 
 
 ■^ I J arrival at •ftf£ he ^ J to walk y\^ J 
 
 diligently 
 
 • If lie had worked diligently in the morning, he could hare been done by 12 o'clock. 
 > roiglit have I work 
 
 \ ^ tins morning 
 
 Nfmished. 
 
 T "*" 4k' 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 
 i Couldhe hate been here last evening?' 
 
 > here J could 
 
 JttX done 
 
To Br.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 1C5 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 « If I be,' &c. 
 
 'If this edict be the Emperor's, it must of course be obeyed.' 
 
 ^5 £—,_!>.[-— jits 
 
 #1- rMr a 
 
 ^r "*" ml "' 
 
 * 1NT~. obedience Mil then 
 
 * 7/Ae 6? there, call Lira to come.' 
 
 fti ^", Sf5 
 
 v there 
 
 FIBK edict 
 
 « //"ji'ou be a good boy, your father will love you.' 
 
 E|J w.llthen / p|'>oar }* J pood PjEf If 
 
 x=: x**-, &», fltf 
 
 * father ) 1.. v 
 
 ir~ si-* =^' J . 
 
 he 
 
 « If Ac be right, it is of course unnecessary for all to wrangle.' 
 
 &C- J 1 '" 4 "*) ^fcnot *>Jfc all ^g be right, ^* It 
 
 . to wrangle 
 
 k mi * tN''' Jt •"" ml'" ^lf 
 
 I | ^y> ncccuary /\. the men J MJ then 'fQl* U 
 
166 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Verbs. 
 
 JVhelher there be this affair or not, we are altogether ignorant.' 
 
 id /. Yek 
 
 1/ii uin 8 ■* 'ffL ei - ^E %- busincu >^5f Hare 
 
 altogether not 
 
 'know. *■ altogether not >we 
 
 #- ' ^- j ' ft- 5 W-- J&2 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 ' If 1 were,' &c. 
 
 ' 7/ they were here yesterday, why did they not remain till the master of the 
 house came ?' 
 
 they 
 
 mun . 
 
 -y* poi JU Uai -frfr J* 
 
 *S[\ not /|£ in -Jf^i if 
 
 ^. M V ^ eft) yr 
 
 ^pwait ^t^thi. ftli' a ] 
 
 l& "J"*") 03 because of 'JTR were 
 
 * f the mas- ' " ' 
 
 3^lJ arrived. •ffl^ they "^C. * 
 
 yesterday 
 
 1 If I were in his place, I would act thus.' 
 ' z pf\- acting. JjyL then would / ftf^ <* 
 
 Sli.s 
 
 *«* 
 
 4^. manner of ^fc l // jh '" 
 
 were in 
 
ToBt ^ CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 « If he zsere to come now, what would you say to him?' 
 
 L« 
 
 "T- 
 
 
 towards 
 It 
 
 gjj now 
 
 «^J have ^jff* yo, 
 
 Per/erf reiMft 
 'Jfyou hate been at Cochin-China, you must know a little of their custom*.* 
 
 Mi*** ) ^-a little ^■•**»] Pff \t 
 
 ' customs \ Cochin-China 
 
 &' i *-, t**J #;» 
 
 \ know 
 
 « If they have been here all night, and have not yet had any thing to eat, they must 
 'indeed be hungry.' 
 
 }%L (haTc) belilei ^^ obtain /^fc wcro ^j* If 
 
 >h«re Jth«J 
 
 hungry. 
 
 Jtbcjp 
 
 J. muil indeed 
 
1GS A GRAMMAR OF THE [OfVeubj. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 i lfyon had been here at that time, I should not have been at all unfortunate.* 
 
 PfEJu 
 
 had been 
 
 ^received flf ^' A< > 
 
 S\\™i 7$l' altogether ^fE "^ 7r|>that 
 
 -4-*. */»«■ y . ic^ ^-=i ..i- «*< 
 
 ^P fortunate >fv «>»' ^l*. '** | Frsf time 
 
 SJ V recurrence, ^f hte ^; " 3 ^ you 
 
 If I had been at jour village last year, I should certainly have called to see you.' 
 
 ?fi come ^ I ypf had ^g 1 If 
 
 J |J I to ask and g [J then >JX^ been at ~"3Xl r 
 
 '|W w4t upon £££ most 4|j£ the abundant (your) Jt ,Mi » ) 
 
 7 Vlastyeat 
 
 4$t,. ^-. #t*.„ #" a " i 
 
 J7rs/ Future Tense. 
 « If I (shall be there, I shall immediately inform him of that affair.' 
 
 3ti "»■ i 
 
 ^fcbein 
 
 ^pi* affair 
 
 \ inform 
 
 plaoe, 
 
 #1 3£ 8 / 
 
T* Be.} (J II J N E 9 1; L A n c uac 
 
 Second Future Tun 
 
 ' If by Octolx-r, next year, tlu<y shall have beat there ten years, liiey m 
 luain two \» i 
 
 thev 
 
 sE *» 41 : wo jij ,r 
 
 "pT"? : 7J(>>« } 91 -.1 
 
 »^ - "">' __,_ I "'"<•• > next j 
 
 VX') S A]:S 
 
 "ytC" -4- ,u r 
 
 P- nuiaiu j ttu 
 
 «A* 
 tenth 
 
 imimtim: mood. 
 * To be or exist.' 
 
 ♦ Toie in a certain slate or condition.' 
 
 ' He lores to be ibreatosi.' 
 >L llu,f - -+", rno't ^p"; tabs 2J£kaa -fQ^ He 
 
J70 A G It A M M A It O V T II E [Of Vi.n r.=. 
 
 Also made by uici ? f£ y 
 
 '• To be poor and proud is contrary to right reason in a great degree.' 
 H -y-po* jttfr n:ai ■££** \y\ " 
 
 uuion. ^J^ not VtK P roud "3^ p00r jC^\ T ° 
 
 fcf. ^ «■«■! 
 
 an 1 also ^vW be 
 
 #1 hi ac- _f M N-rfe> 
 
 Spf cord with ySl greatly ;*^U 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 ' Being.' 
 
 lit* } being poor, earnestly begged that a Utile money might be given to him. 
 t|, f (Mfto j-t* ktfev »r 7 S 
 
 j^y | lavc grantc-1 T}4y poor y^h He 
 
 
 heir- 
 
 The verb Ij be is sometimes entirely omitted, as, 
 ' Are you hungry V 
 
 0~7 IRJU, $£,, #?~ 
 
 ' No, but 1 am thirsty a little.' 
 
 Jill' 1 -I=? s '* Jtt "" ~*v^ ^ 
 
 j-^ little -^J liavc 'j > » but ^f\ Not 
 
 Vrf « yiy •=#£■ fi * Ef * W 
 
 ^UOnt. a 5J&I ^U 
 
 • How old are you i* 
 ^Uacord? 4: Jn ><••"» y^sicat ^> u» ny ^fij^ You (hovr) 
 
To Do] CHINESE LANGU A G E. HI 
 
 1 1 am eight year» of age.' 
 
 To inferiors it is said, , 
 
 '^-^ V how many 
 
 The ceremonious form of the question, is 
 
 1 I- kang _rJi. *•»* MB <™» «gdfe.*** 
 
 P\.»s<- j-\ •° ur n ° bie r^M *° ask pR ibtj 
 
 THE VERB TO DO 
 
 !• made hy Isd $fc; tsofe; wei%, hing fj. 
 ' They do as they please.' 
 
 %1: i^;:l ( ,u„„ fan •%> 
 
 t«nd) 
 
 1 What work does he do ?' 
 
 X«-o %-*) $&- ! 
 
 4 Will you do it or not V 
 
 ?:-. «£ 1T- w?« 
 
]7* A G I? A M M \ 11 O F T II K f n '' V>.m 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 ' Wiial aro you doing V 
 
 Or 
 
 
 
 
 Or 
 
 \ on 
 
 1 " ■* what 
 
 PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 
 ' That work is donr.' 
 
 4Sk*n it**) M si ') 
 
 V work V 
 
 Dove,' is rendered these several ways 
 
 4 ' > 
 
 Or 
 
 >|jk™ 
 
 — * ^ i^ 
 
Do and did.] CHINESE L A N G U A (J E. 173 
 
 Or 
 
 Or 
 Or 
 Or 
 
 =ji"*i sn*. #~ 
 
 Or 
 
 ~T to*!, /jjjjfc T,i 
 
 Or 
 
 ~J U«A. ^V /„? ^j(j t*« >f,^ 7V5 
 
 no in DID. 
 
 xiliarics, are included in the principal verb. 
 < Do vtm remember what I said t> you the day before yesterday »' 
 
 "•fa fc,r * — v*_ ^Errl t/N 
 *- W-W^ " £ „ N 
 
A Gil Ail MA II OF THE 
 
 <Doj 
 
 iou know V 
 
 JS^ 
 
 <\fy You 
 
 
 >Laow 
 
 ( Do you 
 
 understand ?' 
 
 
 "fg^vou 
 
 V uuderstand. vunJcMtaid 
 
 ' Did he come yesterday V 
 
 ^fe COM 
 
 #s 
 
 [Or Vi an. 
 
 1 1 / I formerly respect him 
 
 ^*0 
 
 •^q£ liim. -40C ro|«ctfor ^j5j' had jRp time ^^ before ' 
 
 1 He ib a good man ; who does not love and repect him V 
 $Luiml 1#C reject g^«Uo Kfgood ^ 
 
Must.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 175 
 
 'I do indeed speak the truth.' 
 
 iM- »rue 
 
 > indeed 1 
 
 • They dotui think of obtaining gain.' 
 
 > Thry 
 
 MUST. 
 
 He must come. 
 
 
 I must go.' 
 
 M 
 
 « p - -Ud i 
 
 $ 
 
 . CJ 
 
 JZ: ' a j 
 
 . mu»t 
 

 170 A (; R A M M A It F TI! E [Of Veb . 
 
 ' Whenever we speak, we must speak Ihe truth 
 
 E*7, 
 
 M ' "' ' mu st f xvlitncvcr 
 
 * You must rise early.' 
 
 line. 
 
 
 early 
 
 « i»/«s< he do that business now ?' 
 > that 
 
 lP'.W 
 
 btuineM ? 
 
 
 OUGHT ; SHOULD. 
 
 « lie ought to go.' 
 
 3; to go. "f{i£ h« 
 
 » ought 
 
Cm ,• CouM.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 * You ought to respect your father and mother. 
 y^L «« respect Afc You 
 
 
 \ ought 
 
 
 'You should do this.' 
 
 manner. 
 
 5= M t,r ft I-*-* i 
 
 ^| manner, ^ktt- thi » 1$L do H should f^ 
 
 CAN; COULD. 
 
 Can' is often made by ti fif. 
 
 ' Can you manage this aflair ?' - 
 
 s this 
 
 -Ar " l AE\ m " 
 
 1 Can you do it or not : 
 
 W* ^CS fai #r fl; 
 
 ' Ho cannot do-it.' 
 
 2ft ( r.;z:>#i ^:s #2 $2 
 
 / r > Hi 
 
 You 
 

 A G 15. A M M Alt OF THE [O* Vr.nns. 
 
 If I could, I would 50 to Keang-tian, directly.' 
 
 j^JJ would directly ^J^ I 
 
 -ft goto '^ do 
 
 I Keang-nan. > could 
 
 'Can and could,' are also made by kd ; tidng ; and ko-ndng. 
 1 1 can obtain a pretty dog.' 
 
 ^J dog jtf «°° d W * 
 =yl "FT*' 
 " yty -\ SfEi hin Y ' J c * a 
 
 > one. > looking 
 
 ^-.J .#}"J #:l. 
 
 « If vou had examined at that time, you could have obtained the truth.' 
 
 3£!h. ^T ft8 ^ ^ cM ) uptime ^If 
 
 -^^ ( mi K ht J. examined 
 
 5C~- »fl~* «-* ^7 ^7 
 
 'frf obtained ^yoo /^f had 7JV that 
 
May ; Might. Will.} CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 MAY; MIGHT. 
 1 He may have examineJ before I came.' 
 
 •*ffh"e ^b* ^1 
 
 tct 
 
 not 
 may 
 
 I examined 
 
 ±11 arrived 
 
 It may rain.' 
 
 Perhaps 
 
 | deicend ^J<^ //«:« } 
 
 Had he applied his mind, he might have improved much more than he 
 
 1 •»*) .fr ^ ^ W ) ij^L cl'pur, 
 
 V advanced. > learning 
 
 ^•migUt 
 
 «- *»r #* 
 
 'much more 
 
 *s 
 
 ubUiliCit 
 
 WILL. 
 
 Will you or not i 
 
 pf -m? Sf\*>i J J win 1*r Y « 
 
) A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Verbs. 
 
 ' He wills it to be thus.' 
 
 X^L ,l »»- Ja' -I m ~3< want &S mu,t Tui He 
 
 'Thus it is his will.' 
 - \ ■ ^~. Chi 
 
 ~ T. chi \ ?l£ This 
 
 I will. 
 
 A?^ |>J<. manner 
 
 j hi. 
 
 'LET,' TO PERMIT. 
 
 #«" it, or cAwn ^, 
 
 ' Let him come up.' 
 
 -J^ la* to » ,hA,,g it Ik ^V J/e» 
 
 yj^. come. L "P flU 1,im PT 1>ennit 
 
 'Will vou let me go?' 
 
 ^r' ^to 6 go ^i« tt-p'lit 
 
 ' Let us walk a while.' 
 
 »*» .rfc. '»'•" tttt <*« --*!■»■ 
 
 a y^ walk >|J then *££ gi "J 
 
 J. We 
 
 J<_LJ '» •■>. /£,v»atk F1J together ^1 J 
 
To Advise.-] CHINESE LANGUAGE. . JS1 
 
 THE VERB TO ADVISE 
 
 May be conjugated in the following manner. A pronoun in the objec- 
 tive case is added to the verb, by which each phrase forms a more complete 
 sense, and is more congenial to the ideas of the generality of Native Assis- 
 tants. It is not thought necessary to write out, at length, the verb, con- 
 nected with each person in both numbers, as it remains the same. 
 
 'To advise,' ktu'cn ~^fj. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present Tense. 
 1 1 advise him.' 
 
 ' You adviso him.' 
 
 #.1. $r5£ j$Z 
 
 1 He advices me.' 
 
 ^fj£ n>*, Sec. $f) a.lvi M . $& He 
 
 Jmpcrftet Tone. 
 * I arfv/Whini befnrp.' 
 
1S2 A GRAMMAR OF THE [OfVeubs. 
 
 ' I advised him yesterday. ' 
 W1 a<l"v"ed WL I 
 
 Or 
 
 
 yesterday 
 tein) 
 
 1 1 advised him just now.' 
 jj|j!j alued ^6 I 
 
 Vjost I 
 
 Pcrftcl Tense. 
 'I have advised him.' 
 
 foci 
 jf|{f advUcd 3fe X 
 
 V have ad\i;e 
 
 3ft J 
 
 have 
 
 The Pcr/ed is formed by tsang ^; or i ^, or nee f| either sepa- 
 
ToAddsc] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 183 
 
 rately or united with king jf|. preceding (he verb : also by Icac u ~j; kvcb ^ 
 following it. It will moreover admit the signs preceding, and kicd follow- 
 ing at the same time; as 
 
 Vhave advised 
 
 61 
 
 
 > ahead* 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 ' At that time,I had advised him.' 
 
 -} *!* W& 
 
 had advised 
 
 
 * 
 1. fll'" 1 *'' #"" 
 
 i already 
 
 1 / A/k/ advised him before that.' 
 
 5fi~ * £:"* 
 
 •fO^ him, &c. /L 
 
 •Mi 
 
 before 
 
 /irif Future. Trme. 
 I will advise him presently. 
 
 T^Imm. $/,(/ adv.M. Jjj/L, T.illpr«fentJy ^j^ 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Verbs. 
 
 him. 
 
 I will advise him.' 
 
 • 
 
 I will advise him to-morrow. 
 -dt±t fcfi.?ii -fT». O* 
 
 ^jf W iU.dw,e 5^1 
 
 ^h'in, 99""«-| 
 
 J to-morrow 
 
 ' Shall and will' may be rendered as in the verb to have ;— See pages 120 
 —125. 
 
 Second Future Tense. 
 < I shall hare advised him before the day after to-morrow.' 
 
 4fe!L. ^feTavc ^fe I 21 the ^C Him \ 
 
 ' *~^ ' * V Day after tomorrow 
 
 HJf advised t)>J- shall ~^Q before /C 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 ' Let me advise him.' 
 
 ^f^him. jffty to advise ^ me flf Permit 
 
 ' Do thou advise him.' 
 
 jj^L. UJfSrt #Vou 
 
 'Let him advise me.' 
 
 5% »*> *«■ %£/) <° advise / f[l£ him fff~ Permit 
 
To Advise.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 185 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 
 Present Tente. 
 
 c You may or can advise him.' 
 
 ' 1 may advise him.' 
 
 J- may 
 
 VX' S 
 
 You can advise him. 
 
 hi 
 'fif Yon 
 
 Irije 
 
 \ advise 
 
 Or 
 
 'j^bioi. H5fa.lvi« "3b or can »*J may 7>p Yo« 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 'Before, I might advise him.' 
 fyl L. "Pf kS ) 7^[ Before 
 
Kj AGRAMMAROFTHE [O* Vbi 
 
 1 You could have advised him thi9 morning.' 
 
 ^ W/ I have advised \ This morning 
 
 ^ 
 
 'You would ad\ ise Kim.* 
 
 pel \ 
 
 y«od) 
 
 would 
 
 You should advise him.' 
 
 l^ advise ffi *°° 
 
 frQJfr him, &c. /J^, JiW 
 
 
 N should 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 ' I may have advised him two days ago.' 
 
 > have advisr d j may 
 
 >^e- Tiftn 
 $l] Before 
 
 i • leing 
 f^ two 
 
 « I can have advised him.' 
 
 
 2 have advised 
 
 }cam 
 
 ftL Ok-** 
 
 
ToAdvise.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 187 
 
 Pluperfect Tense: 
 
 might have advised him before that.* 
 k " ? «) 3ft i ^fK nut 
 
 ffi 
 
 \ might 
 ■^ have ^/[I btf 
 
 « You could have advised him yesterday.' 
 
 $»*) "FT- 1 #?!. 
 
 >»dtri»e<I J could 
 
 f- * j||-J nf.o 
 
 • V yesterday 
 [g him. ^h.ve ,« M j '^ 
 
 'He should have advised you before.' 
 » If I bad been with him at that tim<*, / tcould hare actritrd him.' 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Op Veubs. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 1 If I advise him.' 
 
 $1 him. tf§)) advise ^ I /fa If 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 * If I before advised him.' 
 
 •f(f£ him. ^jtyadvued yQ before Jjfc I ^' if 
 
 Per/ec< Tense. 
 
 * If I have advised him.* 
 ^lf 
 
 \ad 
 ^ him. ^f 
 
 "^ I 
 
 yell 
 have 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 < If 1 had advised him when he came.' 
 
 /H had H^ the time •fffy he 
 
 > adv 
 
To Advise.] C II I N E S E L A N G U A G E. 189 
 
 Future Tense. 
 c If I shall advise him.' 
 ^L. Iffta/vi* T^f'/hT ^fel /&" 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 * 1 want to advise him.' 
 
 • To arfme him is good.' 
 
 #f£i ^^' 'ftb'^ W)^ yj^o 
 
 mm the >P/J Advi»ing 
 suddenly 
 
 PARTICIPLES-PRESENT. 
 « Whilst advising him, he suddenly became angry 
 
 3KrominB.a£?»nKtr Wi hc one ) 'W 
 
 * - 1 1 ■ U i . 1 1 1 > 
 
 ft£ up ^ST l" ue d T* down •* |Rf «i»ie fjji M 
 
 'Whilst advising him' is also rendered thu9, 
 )U] »id»t of. 3^S ,1 " Tui 
 
 him lift Advi.ing 
 
 Or, 
 
 VmJn 
 
 J- time. \ tliat 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of YeBUt. 
 
 ' Why did he not attend whilst you were advising him.' 
 
 ^P» not l^j midst Syl* Yoq 
 
 or 
 
 > wherefore 
 
 attend. 
 
 > wherefore 
 
 0-i 
 
 PEKFECT PARTICIPLE. 
 * Advised.' 
 
 ~~t Uaoi. ij$U Ktulm 
 
 Or 
 
 Or 
 
 
 
 
 ~7tx 
 
 fir- 1 - 
 
 Or 
 
 
 
 
 J||. p». 
 
 i Wi 
 
 ?* /eooir. 
 
 £t* 
 
 rjg m ,„, 
 
 COMPOUND PERFECT. 
 * Hating adxisrd him, I immediately retired.* 
 
 5H backward ^ "«» ^t 
 
 went. 
 
 pin '•" 
 
 Q\-4 immediately 
 
 "f&h itt,.en > HaT "'gadT;icd 
 
ToAdd:-\ CHINESE LANGUAGE. 91 
 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 
 • To be advised.' 
 
 ':W 
 
 lob 
 
 idrice. 
 
 ''j^C, To re€eiT * 
 
 Or 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 bah 
 niv'ice. 
 
 .5^ To receive 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 • 
 
 ' I am ad' 
 
 kised.' 
 
 ffl] *:i>i>L, 
 
 ■■ ^ 
 
 
 Or 
 
 
 
 
 • 3t 
 
 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 * I ora* advised yesterday.' 
 
 
 ru 
 
 knU 
 
 adrUcd. 
 
 % tu S 
 
19* 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Vsrbs 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 ! been 
 
 3fc' 
 
 ' I have been advised.' 
 
 G» 
 
 pei M 
 
 \ have been 
 
 ke*?n 
 advised. 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 « 1 had then been advised.* 
 
 ^ Tad ffi 
 
 m 
 
 That 
 
 
 time 
 been 
 
 ri 
 
 advised. 
 
 Qd 
 
 Future Tense. 
 « 1 shall be advised.' 
 
 lent* _». ^K G3 
 
 advised. -'Et vci ~) ^V. I 
 
 
 IMPF.RATIVE MOOD. 
 ' Be thou advised.' 
 
 ktuin 
 advised. 
 
 &i #vi 
 
TobeJdvucdj CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 ' Let him be advised.' 
 5fja<lv i8e d. T^C^ fQ£l.in. §TLe« 
 
 POTENTIAL MOOD. 
 
 Pnsrnt Tame. 
 ' Tie may or can be advised ' 
 
 ud.;cr. -fl* can "1W uc. i*. M He 
 
 Or 
 
 #1 m~ # 
 
 Imperfect Trnse. 
 ' He mi^ht before be advised ' 
 
 ^Jj IZL, 4c. "FXkS J ^ He 
 
 V miclit 
 
 »<7n 
 Ix-tbre 
 
 tint 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 ' He may have been nd\ised.' 
 
 ^ "^ ) ^ He 
 
 'havrbrrn 
 
iyt A GRAMMAR OF T II E [Of Vebbs 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 1 1 might have been advised before that.' 
 
 \ mighl 
 
 have btrn 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 « If I he advised.' 
 
 advbed. -$£ be ■$& I 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 ' If 1 were advised before.' 
 
 ^ 
 
 kntn 
 advised. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 If I have been advised. 
 
 km?» , £__. yet 
 
 advued. 
 
 ^K£ kin* * 
 
 already 
 
TobeAdvised] CHI NESE LANGUAGE. 105 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 ' If at that time I had been advised.' 
 
 '«&:r.L #-, au b#sl #:, 
 
 Future Tense. 
 ' If I shall be advised.' 
 
 advised. 
 
 •m*** 3£i ^if 
 
 IMIMTlVi; MOOD. 
 
 I love to be advised. 
 
 »=L #-* fc- &- 
 
 'It is good to be advised.' 
 
 PARTICIPLES— PRESENT. 
 
 < He A«'»g «/w'j«f soon reformed.' 
 
 8fc«. 
 
 I being 
 
 preformed. » | 
 
 , if*?, 
 
 udturd 
 
l£G A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Vtaiis. 
 
 Advised.' 
 
 $H- T"" 5 t$ 
 
 Beside pel and show, which have been given above, as forming the passive, 
 the word {jff l)ng, to receive, is also sometimes used, as 
 
 I am taught.' 
 
 "4^ teacUta*. yj.1 
 
 receive "Cjli I 
 
 But the passive form of the verb does not prevail in Chinese. Instead 
 of saying '4 am advised by him,' they prefer saying ' He advises me.' And 
 instead of saying, ' This was made by him,' they say, ' This is that which he 
 made.' Thus, 
 
 
 * made. 
 
 Thii 
 
 #;?. 
 
 The sentence, 'Virtue was always praised by men/ they render, 'Vir- 
 tue is that which men always praised.' Thus, 
 
TobeAd.ised] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 1G7 
 
 A J " z?lfe. Skin . 
 
 -fa ^ 
 
 JOT -* ^ 
 
 irtne 
 
 1 Tfl <"* ) 
 
 i > praised. Jtfc «M ' 
 
 always 
 
 ■ praised. fPp 
 
 ' This table was made by (lie carpenter A-lin/ — is turned into, — ' This 
 table is (hat which the carpenter A-lin made.' Thus, 
 
 l made. " the carpenter T TUij 
 
 I A-li.i * table 
 
 The Vtr'x Av«: '^t toincrciie, .iivl^^pfo slril e, are sometimes joined 
 with other \ i nies ciciioting- the action of the principal verb 
 
 with which they arc join d. Thus, 
 
 AY? 
 (■•crease 
 
 Jl'j //H 1m 
 
 la not to adJ to a person's punUhmeiif, but 'to inflict punishment.' 
 ' l'u injure.' 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Vei 
 
 ' To confer favour.' 
 
 Is 'To listen.' 
 , * To move.' 
 * To sneeze,' &c. &c. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 'It rains.' 
 |^f>Jrain. | S Descends 
 
 c It snows.' 
 
 T 
 
 Hti 
 
 Descend* 
 
 pi — •-* Hei 
 
 hail. f* Descend* 
 
 It hails. 
 
 T 
 
 ' It concerns you.' 
 
 < you. 
 
! '.Verbs.) CHINESE LANGUAGE. 199 
 
 ' It belongs to him.' 
 •fft^, him. /H) belonging to ~T£ It i» " 
 
 1 It blows.' 
 
 Sing ^fi Fan 
 
 the wind. ffljl Turns about 
 
 Or 
 
 /3i\ the wind. ^& Kis, 
 
 It is your duty.' 
 
 At, 
 
 ■^■j* original > t» « 
 
 
 Jj is better.' 
 
 more J(f-~ H 
 
 >T S»"d. ^ 
 
 ' /< respects that person.' 
 ' that 
 
 pointing to 
 
 ' It respects the great stone on the top of the hill.' 
 
 /V«'«t J^qiop jojto -££ i. 
 
 >£j .tone. 2^ ,h « -UJ Ui " "f M I 
 
 pointing 
 
2C0 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THli [0»Vbrb.,&c. 
 
 « It delights me.' 
 
 to rejoice. 
 
 Auanj -JV lt " 
 
 !&"' ^ 
 
 causiug 
 
 It grieves me.' 
 
 fct Ski 
 
 
 causes 
 
 It thunders.' 
 
 (fly 
 
 -='— thunder- >f J Makes 
 
CHINESE LANGUAGE. 201 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 1st. OF NUMBER. 
 
 ' Once.' 
 
 ^7V time. One 
 
 'Twice.' \ 
 
 ^f\. times. 1 Two 
 
 « '1'hrice.' 
 
 — >t* '«* * &"« 
 
 Three 
 
 yT^V. times. ___ —b 
 
 ' Me came t\vic« 
 
 —.yL* <«? 6rh » * Td 
 
 two* <titt. He 
 
 Sd. OF ORDER. 
 
 ' First.' 
 
 'Secondly.' 
 
 Or 
 
 ' I irst' 
 
 ^"' * «® 
 
 2 
 
20? A GRAMMAR OF THE [Or Adverbs. 
 
 ' Secondly.' 
 
 chay. 
 
 Lastly.'* 
 
 ' In the first place.' 
 Or, 
 
 When three things are mentioned, they may be rendered as follows— 
 
 < He first discoursed respecting Astronomy ; secondly, respecting Geography, and 
 finally (or lastly) he discoursed respecting good writing.' 
 
 H$J discoursed $S ^ "J >^- ' " 1 . "^^ ' 1 In the 
 
 H " f Geography ; > Astronomy ; {beginning 
 
 JM mj * " -=|£ cMy ' 7$t' c'<a» ' . p^" diicoirie* 
 
 ^u 3t re ' sp£Ctius ^C**«*N 
 
Or A»Ti»»v CHINESE LANGUAGE. 901 
 
 M. Of fLAC*. 
 
 « Here.' 
 
 Or, 
 
 'There.' 
 Or, 
 
 * Where;' 
 Or, 
 Or, 
 
 1 Elsewhere.' 
 
201 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Advert 
 
 'Any where.' 
 
 m M - - 
 
 -* fl 
 
 %* m 
 
 * ^ 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 ^ 
 
 t^r 
 
 * 
 
 
 ' Every where.' 
 
 
 
 jO." 
 
 • B c " a 
 
 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 
 
 ii"- 1 
 
 JfJTW 
 
 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 
 zfcz, fji 
 
 place flU 
 
 No 
 
 
 TIius, ' It is found every w 
 
 here.' 
 
 SV& have. 
 
 
 jfjf place 
 
 
 The same is expressed by 
 
 
 
 
 /pj Lave. 
 
 i Every pla«« 
 
 
 'No 
 
 • where.' 
 
 
 
 Bt" 
 
 3JT5 
 
 
 
 ' It is no where.' 
 
 
 ^P^. Jgjjrf 
 
 #?- 
 
 * 
 
OfAdtebbs.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 205 
 
 'Herein.' 
 
 ft"> jit™ 
 
 ' JV hither are you going V 
 
 3; go? 7*pYo U 
 
 Or, 
 
 thcr 
 
 5* s" j8 Place ' one fjf> which ^fj to ^ Y OT 
 
 • Come hither.' 
 
 >liere. 
 
 
 MM 
 
 Or, 
 
 'Do you go thither}' 
 place. ' one ^ tlut ^fj xT "J* go tf$> v! 
 
 'He went vpi;ard.' 
 
 55 go'»R- 1 . "P '^ w«ot -fff^ He 
 
 'He went downward.' 
 
 ^;u T- &;- # 
 
SOS 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Op Adverbs. 
 
 <JIe -wtntforzcard.' 
 
 , M •££*'*"" Otf:""' Jdt n 
 
 i* go'rr RlJ forward ^£- P r °« e<1 «<> ftS He 
 
 'He went backwards.'' » • 
 
 Gr, 
 
 ' From whence do you come J' 
 2j^ come J / ffp You 
 
 > whence 
 
 2j£ come ? JS I >,ace ' one 7il* wUat Pi from rF Yo ' 
 
 'He went from hence." 1 
 
 /here 
 
 here 
 
 tset 
 from 
 
 Or, 
 
 » Ari r t> c/,K ^ cfc? £j t,et ,1 n 
 
 - m h^ ««nt. Jtt!U place 3^0. thii |-| from "fQL H * 
 
 ' He went from thence.' 
 ^LV went- J*C£ ^||> that )|J f r01B $fa H. 
 
 ' Whilhe\ soever you go.' 
 03k place Tfj* which ^ <J* you . ^\ Not 
 
 _^ go. on« ^fclj to "J rj reipected 
 
O* Adverbs.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 20T 
 
 «ih. OF TIMES PRESENT. 
 « Now.' 
 
 Or, 
 
 TV B* 
 
 Or, 
 
 Or, 
 Or, 
 
 Also 
 
 y^» Ha. ^[P Jo« 
 
 Or, 
 
 &*• AS* 4 
 
 Or, 
 Or, 
 
 • • Today.* 
 
308 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Aovr-m 
 
 Or, 
 
 \tV- 
 
 ^/H. 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 ,. 
 
 in™ 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 B» 
 
 ^wAi 
 
 TIME PAST. 
 
 < He lias already come.' 
 
 xjv come 
 
 #ie 
 
 
 
 
 «] 
 
 Before.' 
 
 Or, 
 
 »• ^ ™«<r 
 
 $f' 1 
 
 "RlJ ™< H 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 tfcfc. *AJ. 
 
 ^s*. 
 
 < 
 
 Lately.' 
 
 fl#" 
 
 3£*" 
 
 has already 
 
Of.Adtebm.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 ' Just now,' referring to time past. 
 
 Or, 
 
 * Yesterday.' 
 Or, 
 
 ' Heretofore.' 
 Sfc "" |t?J '**» 
 
 ' It has not been so hitherto.' 
 /I^ manner, /pj have A-^ now <^*- com ' n B t^J 
 
 afl, tun 3^C ■>»' 3n l<> |Oj 
 
 * Long ago.' 
 
 \ Before 
 
 « ' In ancient times.' 
 
 keing 
 towards 
 
<2in 
 
 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of ADvtna*. 
 
 «Hi s ll 
 
 i antiquity.' 
 
 ~fc koi 
 
 f~^ Shang 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 T^ M - 
 
 ^C^ 
 
 OF TIME TO COME. 
 
 •To-: 
 
 morrow.' 
 
 ^'" n - 
 
 Ij/J Mug 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 0* 
 
 fl£| «hf 
 
 < Next day.' . 
 
 %'*»' 
 
 ^H*o 
 
 'Not 
 
 yet.' 
 
 ^n* «»f. 
 
 ^> 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 > f[T <*»«*. 
 
 ^™ 
 
 <■ Ere long.' 
 
 *£ kf. 
 
 ^T«a» ? 
 
 1 Hereafter.' 
 
 %$*> 
 
 7^-^» P 
 
OfAdvebbs.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. Sll 
 
 Or, 
 
 1 Henceforth.' 
 •l^C afterwards. JK/^ to /*-j now JEEJ From 
 
 • Wait a little ; he'll come by and by.' 
 
 I"*") ^-^ little; ^F Wi 
 
 C by and by 
 
 ' Instantly.' 
 
 Or 
 
 c He'll come immediately.' 
 tyfi- com*. j^L will immediately / f(f£ He 
 
 OFTIMF. INDEFINITE. 
 4 Oft, often, &C.' 
 ^/^ lime*. ~^$t Many 
 
 4 Repeatedly.' 
 • Frequently.' 
 
212 A GRtMMAR OF THE [OfAdveb 3s . 
 
 ' Sometimes.' 
 
 fj$ «**. ^ re* 
 
 ' Return soon.' 
 
 2^C*.'. |gj^ _^t^ ffiyi 
 
 1 Seldom.' 
 
 ftfc ,kt. 4 N Shaoi 
 
 Or, 
 
 Or, 
 Or, 
 
 * Daily.' 
 
 * R * 
 
 ^■ttin. ZC Te>n 
 
 ' JVeekly may be expressed by 
 
 yV days. -J^ seven "^l Each 
 
 It is sometimes expressed by 
 But onJy persons acquainted with professed Christians know the phrase. 
 
OfAdvirbs.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 913 
 
 1 Monthly.' 
 
 Or 
 
 H~ ft™ 
 
 * Yearly.' 
 ^E »«!?«. 43. ar«t 
 Or 
 
 Jp .;?,. ^ mfa 
 
 • Always.' 
 
 ' J1 hen he came, 1 was writing.' 
 —J- character. J^ write fp£ I Hyf time 2^- came -fQ^ lie 
 * JFA«i you have finished, you may then return home.' (1) 
 
 > retain bome. 
 
 —fifing 
 S7 .ben 
 
 (i; ' Coae when yon have- finlibed,' 
 <$>£ then #' Yoa 
 
 3TC CMBC. «**. living 
 
 |1^ «iv j finUbed 
 
UNIVERSITY 
 
 214 
 
 AM MAR OF THE 
 
 [Of AnvEn: 
 
 ; I never saw him.' 
 
 
 saw ^1 
 
 
 him. ^@ Ubngy 
 
 \ never 
 
 
 'Again.' 
 
 
 W~ 
 
 
 ^,. 
 
 
 6lh. OF QUALITY. 
 
 
 Adverbs of quality may Tie rendered into Chinese literally, as 'wisely.' 
 
 'j^*. manner. J^ *J the pJtJX knowing ^j^ Seeing and 
 
 i. e 
 
 .'In 
 
 a wise manner.' 
 
 < 
 
 He acts wisely.' 
 
 A 
 
 kein^ 
 
 #> 
 
 wijfe 
 
 shl | 
 
 IwUdy 
 
 « 
 
 „| 
 
 | ' J^' business 
 
 m 
 
 y-'o" 
 
 
 But the word 'manner/ expressed by the termination 'ly' in English, 
 is generally omitted, and the quality which, when connected with a noun, 
 is an Adjective, when joined to a Verb still retains the same form though 
 
 used adverbially. Thus, 
 
3jr Adverbs.] CHINESE LANGUAG 
 
 E. 
 
 ' A swift hor?e.' 
 
 
 ITT fii FP mi 
 
 y*-' (N.) one f ki y Uorse ■ 
 
 f^ Swift 
 
 ♦He walks swiftly.' 
 
 
 i |y^.5«UUy. 'JuLHe 
 
 
 ^ L 
 
 
 215 
 
 4 »alU 
 
 Swift and swiftly' are the same in Chinese. 
 ' He can write well.' 
 
 ^f good. 4^f Can ^ W " te "ffl " e 
 
 •He deals justly.' 
 
 jnsUy 
 
 ' He speaks leisurely.' 
 
 fjjf *<*»*) TjL He 
 
 J »peaki. 
 
 fg~J It-),. , 
 
 J. leiwrely 
 
 tJf 
 
216 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Or Adverbs. 
 
 Or, 
 
 pfifLkehng-i 'KB He 
 
 ■■peaks 
 
 IS" 5 #«•*) 
 
 V leisurely (mildly) 
 
 ' He speaks at random.' 
 
 =*h *«*W jt 111 
 
 pty .peak.. -ftii 1Ie 
 
 f<iL '"■■■• : 
 
 J at random 
 
 You should not speak confusedly.' 
 
 ~m yao& Aft* Ni 
 
 -55^ wanted '|*J > Yoa 
 
 speaking 
 
 'He says txpreuly that he cannot do it.' 
 
 ^f\ not tiff mt *g-i 
 
 ; expressly 
 
 ME- R" 
 
OfAdverbsJ CHI NESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 'Walk slowly.' 
 
 JfSf. 
 
 \ slowJy 
 
 He talks foolishly.' 
 
 rot 
 without 
 
 
 y^\ knowledge 
 
 ' He reads badly.' 
 
 
 Mft, 
 
 readi 
 . li 
 
 Or 
 
 yv "<>• ^ »«*'y -y pit 
 
 |_( book. ^|£^» to rend J^J undentand ^1 "\ not 
 
 He has greatly erred in manning that affair. 
 h«» -^3" *«"U>f»» ^f |) that 
 
 »14 erred. /\L greatly Xf- <N.) 
 
 ^f :J I .... 3=J£ buiipru yffi that f[ji He 
 
*Jb A GUAM MA it OF THE [OfAbvehbs. 
 
 ' He reasons ably 
 yeit 
 baring 
 
 m 
 
 \ ability. 
 
 6ib. OF QUANTITY. 
 
 < Much.* 
 
 ' Too much. 
 ^„ ^ 
 
 Or, 
 
 ^ * |K *«* 
 
 ' Little.' 
 
 i|^ Skat. 
 
 < Too little.' 
 
 ^* .hai. y^C Tu? 
 
 « Very little.' 
 
Op Advbim.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 2J9 
 
 * How much.' 
 
 
 Or, 
 
 Also. 
 
 ^a 
 
 ' How great?' 
 Or, 
 
 1 Enough.' 
 Or, 
 
 . ' That is enough.' 
 
 7*"' ft" 
 
 It is an expression which the Chinese often use. 
 
 
 • A great deal.' 
 
 
 #«■ WH- 
 
 Or, 
 
 
 
 ^u. ^"f««* 
 
220 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Adverds. 
 
 7th. OF DOUBT. 
 'Perhaps.' 
 
 Or, 
 
 About so high 
 
 V so V 
 
 .- ™ > About 
 
 8lb. OF AFFIRMATION. 
 
 ■ Yes.'(l) 
 
 ^- 
 
 Certainly, surely, undoubtedly.* 
 
 ffi* 1=1 ~ 
 
 ' Really.' 
 
 ' He is really a good man.' 
 X£ is Ttfe He 
 
 #?:;•.< 
 
 really 
 
 (l) It is commonly said, titic the -jB ^*r, and cMag »M -®r IP, 'just so. : 
 
OfAdvebbs] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 281 
 
 ' Indeed it is so.' 
 
 ' so. \ Indeed 
 
 fjtf. 
 
 ' He is a <rw/y good iran.' 
 
 ^ man. ^ff a good / ^ i, Jl| really ^ truly '/{f^ He 
 
 1 Decidedly.' 
 
 ' It is positively thus.' 
 ^(g. e } /tr Positively 
 
 ; tum. 
 
 Kh. OF NEGATION. 
 
 < Not.' 
 PA 
 
 By no means.' 
 
 Jk" ^ 
 
 ^«ot 
 
 -dHfc- Wl 
 
 thousand -rJvf Ten tuouiaud 
 
 Not at all. 
 
 ^\\ JiVt 
 
 /** .Art. T.iivr 
 
 AitofttUet 
 
S9i A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Adverbs. 
 
 Of 
 
 ~ff£. is. ^j\ not /V Greatly 
 
 Beside the negative pod Zfi, there are these nine, voS Ify ; v 06 $fe ; (*J 
 t>o* ^ ; /oe $ j wd ^ ; md 3% ; mi^; fei p ; wing Jjfi. W 
 
 'It is not so.' 
 
 '.**• M ea M M ^ 
 
 Ue has not.' 
 
 '^ has. 7f^ ^t ftfc 
 
 /r. Ti 
 
 He 
 
 'On erring you should not be afraid to reform.' 
 I^C to reform. (3) pfl fear <%/] not ^.fj should ^O On erring (yon) 
 
 Do not idly spend the day.' 
 
 VoS 
 Do not 
 
 [il] the day. J^ pass JM. «& "ft 
 
 1 had not leisure to pay my respects.' 
 
 ,. Not 
 to pay respects. 
 
 hfw ' 
 
 > to pay respects. 
 •* ~1=E leisnrf 
 
 am not adequate to it.' 
 
 *|jll . ^^ adequate to ]J3- U ^C 
 
 not >*V. 1 
 
 (1") In Kly-fctug and some other ancient books, the character vC /^ is in constant use as a ocgatire. 
 («; To the neg.uves add m ||£ ; mi ^ ; .»« j|g; ma/ ^£. (3) s 6 |S|. ifln =fe 
 
Or Adteiib8.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 923 
 
 Commonly, 
 
 ytfi, come to r»". *S\\ not y jT$£ do *j[J& 
 
 ' To his thanks there was no end.' 
 
 |g:£. 
 
 #=■ 
 
 ft£ 
 
 m - 
 
 ' give tbaoki 
 
 Thnrp i< no 
 
 better than tl.is.' 
 
 
 " -frr »-* 
 
 ^flutter 
 
 
 7/ J *" 
 
 ; It is in no wise what I ft tab.' 
 
 **h *' 
 
 rrT". p/»» v 
 
 YJ\ th.t -Lieh ^p 
 
 « Do not oppos".' 
 
 
 .i jV, -wo*. fHT Do ■<* 
 
 ' Do not deceive yourself.' 
 {[^(.VKIv JJ/C deceive | J voorjeif ^ Do r.l 
 
 ' Not to regard one's promise.' 
 | "J t,,tb. " J I u. moutli(or) ^ifj regiid J» J Nol 
 
 Co *■**£. u ~h 
 
224 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Adveiibs. 
 
 ltth. OF INTERROGATION. 
 ' How will you manage V 
 si 
 
 ;pf manage? f^ Yc 
 
 >how 
 
 Or, 
 
 p:l g e ? . # 
 
 
 
 'How ?' expressing doubt, as, 
 * How is it thus :' 
 
 ! Urns? 
 
 «""' #;.'.:.» 
 
 •How is it not:' 
 .\ c. Meaning to affirm, that it it. 
 
Or Adverbs^ CHINESE LANGUAGE. |ft 
 
 In books, ho6 $J; hi ^ ; vod £? ; vod ^ ; ngan *£, are used for ' how. 
 
 '"Why.' 
 'jPjwh.t. |^| Became of 
 
 Or. 
 
 Or, 
 
 Also, 
 
 Or, 
 
 S^j came. 'Jl'J «" 
 
 "^ owe. 'f 17 
 
 nvt 
 
 Cause 
 
 Hi 
 
 What 
 
 iili: 
 
 J. caiue. I wtat 
 
 ' Whether, does he remain or go ?' 
 3^ go Jp<; or ^£ "main ^ whtlber ^ 
 
 lltb. OF COMPARISON. 
 
 * More,' in quantity. 
 
 For 'more' and 'most' joined to Adjectives, ace the Comparison of Ad- 
 jectives. 
 
22G A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Adverbs. 
 
 « He walked more than a. thousand lc.' 
 ^£* more. ^fl le JT^ U.e ioad 'flji He 
 
 /tZJ and J a thousand ^\ J walked 
 
 ' You have walked two paces more.' 
 
 2^» mort j'J'* You 
 
 f^J two* >f^ '•'"* ^ 
 _^J/ paces. J 
 
 'This is two talcs less.' 
 
 JjlrJ tales. H? is less ^B CAe ) 
 
 — ' £ This 
 
 -:: mi 
 
 Have you been better recently V 
 
 ^tn* /nrfln 
 3L%1 mure 
 
 t t;(r; 
 
 4 »J" You 
 
 | — ■+ UaoB „ 
 
 hc&nx 
 
 recently 
 
 fa 
 
 Low much more' is made by ho hwdng $L 'fPf, and hwdng ts'ee XL ^- 
 
Of Advebbs.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 ' Jfyou be unable to take a short journey, how much more, a long one. 
 ^§£ a distant >f J" walk tfM road 'J£f U 
 
 f A preat «iii lli y limes.' 
 
 3^ lira™. ^t««»il 1 
 
 J. A qreat mauv 
 2A » j 
 
 Or, 
 
 [HI times. ^J"//ho»^ 
 
 4 A great many 
 
 Or, 
 
 'A great deal more.' 
 
 • \ CIV.' 
 
 Or, 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Adverbs. 
 
 * Very good . ' 
 
 1 Very bad,' 
 
 j^haoi. ^p* ^Uai -y* SM 
 
 'A very long time.' 
 
 * Very much or many." 
 
 ' Very few.' 
 jL» «Aa3. ZMl Shin 
 
 ' Very great.' 
 
 -fc*. ;£«,., ^s„ 
 
 'Very little.* 
 ' Very ugly.* 
 
OrAnvEHBs.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 229 
 
 ' Very superior quality.* 
 
 f^ It— X YU 
 
 * Very pleasant.' 
 
 > very. 
 
 Pleasant 
 
 * Very important, urgent.' 
 * Very high.' 
 
 g*j<* ^ to ,» -jg^ 
 
 'Almost enough.' 
 ip^ cnongU. ^^^ much *^J "* not >*TT. Krrc 
 
 { Nearly the same.' 
 I J Hj moc. ;^* > much ^> not ^^f Error 
 
 Or, 
 
 ^|h./. — vh |ij<«* =^" Hft'* ; 
 
 • A little more.' 
 
A GRAMMAR 
 
 OF 1 
 
 HE [Of Adveubs. 
 
 'Ticsc two arc alike.' 
 
 
 JI-'J same 
 
 5= Cfcl 
 ^tt. These 
 
 ^ v*9 
 
 W' 
 
 >- 
 
 J two 
 
 •^•JC manner. 
 
 fB' 
 
 • He rides about every where.' 
 
 "i»4 rides 
 
 fti 
 
 ie 
 
 4i >jT ahorse- 
 
 
 cAc3 "J 
 
 \ going round 
 
 • Since thataft'air is thus, 1 have no 
 
 resource.* 
 
 
 
 tfc'V 
 
 ^ Lesouree. jfR ^ 
 
 
 ;■ Since 
 
 *** 
 
 fii**) Jt*dT- 
 
 S that 
 
 TO i 
 
 
 tjjj ,Ui " 
 
 i 
 
 •^p- affair 
 
CHINESE LANGUAGE. 231 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 'Of/ 
 As denoting the possessive, is made by ch5 -£, and /e'2 £$. 
 ' The house of my friend.' 
 
 house. »yj puiy 
 
 • friend 
 
 ye* ' 
 
 'Of,' denoting an effect, is rendered byyln ];§[, and vei^ 
 * He died q/a fever.' 
 ^XU dicd - TJ^f di ""« |2hJ bcc»u»e of qfy H. 
 
 Or, 
 
 ' died. * a fever 
 
 1 For.' 
 'Make a g&rmcnt for me in the present mole.' 
 
 (^j'.'' ^ mike C U,U) ^>Yo» 
 
 /fili-) HJj'Ume for 
 
 * garment. 
 
2S2 A CRAMMAR OF THE [Of Prepositions. 
 
 ' For,' instead of. 
 'IH thank you to attend to that business for me.' 
 
 *i„,, w->-> i #1 #;'- &? 
 
 J- that 
 "J-p ^/T to manage T V* for PFJ rc< l ae!t 
 
 •For,' on account of. 
 'He loved the boy for his good disposition.' 
 
 ( disposition. J- for ' the boy 
 
 'Into,' is implied in the verb. 
 
 'He left the city, and went into the country to live. 
 
 ^g|£ he&n; -. -fg^ H e 
 
 \ the country 
 
 ch.ng 
 
 /jg* *< a ) i»c ' hc ci,? 
 
 J. to live. 
 
 #•"' flB- 
 
 ^ t. «cnt into 
 
 ' He went into the house.' 
 
 ^.witUn. ^L the home jlP| went f^ 
 
Of Prepositions.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 833 
 
 Take the money, and put it into the bag 
 
 5^. and put it y=f^- '1 ': 
 % Into ^ v< 
 
 the bag. ^^. and put it ;=f a '. Tml 
 
 " the money 
 
 M the month of ~J* '** 
 'They put the goods into the ship's hold.' 
 
 hold. S\ iDt0 JU ni0 ved 'fljj 1* 1 
 
 /git thc » l,iu ' s >t ""' S<""is -jf J "•*" 
 
 The, 
 
 < Within.' 
 « They are within the house.' 
 
 ^r*» -fi"i-" }Tb ' 
 
 'He is a»7A;n the interior parts of the house. 
 J interior. 
 
 the bouse 
 
 1 He can finish within the time appointed.' 
 
 ^tl complete. Jftf ■>»»»«« >2-- '" PI ,,,c dav fOi Hc 
 
 -f^f can f^ within ;}$! ■PPOtaled /\\^ 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Prepositions. 
 
 < Without.' 
 ' He stands without the door.' 
 
 tyy outside. 2^. '• P^ <he"door /Jfc b fjf£ He 
 
 1 Go without me.' 
 
 3fe me ^ ?ou 
 
 =fe£- Rr-] 
 
 excluding 
 
 « With.' 
 ' Go with me.' 
 
 tZSj 8°« '3% me |WJ with l^pYott 
 
 • He writes with a pencil.* 
 • J ' characters. Jfcj to write -=p. a pencil yTJ nscs ftfii He 
 
 ' He killed a man with a knife.' 
 
 Ajtn ^ M -Jrt fa* |V| . /T. 7* 
 
 a man. 7^5^ kiUcd y J a knife Jj^ by or with y(ai Hc 
 
 ' He subjects men 6y virtue.' 
 yV mcn - /3J* subjects ^j| virtue J[^ by ^1^ He 
 
■ They 
 
 O, Prepositions.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. »» 
 
 « They obtain food 1$ diligent labor.' 
 
 ^|| obtain 3|7 diligently 
 
 « Down.' 
 
 < Go </oa?n the stone steps.' 
 
 ^" Vine steps 
 
 down 
 
 Go down .' 
 
 ^- T- W« 
 
 c Put down the book.' 
 "^u^book. "^'d'.™ Jfc^ T\F YoB 
 
 < From.' 
 
 < To.' 
 • He went from Nanking to Peking.' 
 
 from 
 
 U.l -' 
 
236 A QBAMMAR OF.THE [Ok Prepositions. 
 
 •At.' 
 ' He lives at Penang.' 
 
 I dwells. \ Penang 
 
 ' He arrived at Hiang-shan yesterday.' 
 ^Ijirrivedat TtHi He 
 
 J | r « han 3 
 
 Heang-shan. J. yesterday 
 
 ltd •* 
 
 'On or upon.' 
 
 Put it on the table. 
 
 Fin? 
 
 the table 
 
 ■J/1 l he thing 
 
 '. the table 
 
 The bricklayer is upon the top of the house. 
 ^£7^T the house <tyfc 
 
 ^J back yQv y f The bricklayer 
 
 ** >The, 
 
Of Pkbt-ositions .] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 237 
 
 <In.« 
 * He lives in the City.' 
 
 ^X; tbr citv *ffj£ He 
 
 He was born in the 50th year of Keen-lung. 
 
 J-oOth 
 
 born 
 
 2l • roe 
 
 ;_L. ,hf ) ^ 
 
 . Keen-lung's 
 
 Si.. &-' 
 
 The book is in the middle of the table. 
 
 "p^' The book 
 tiie table 
 
 cm! 
 
 ,b- i^""* *~ 
 
 Or, 
 
 | midst. \ toe tablet 
 
 |;r,,, J zf.,J ^;~1 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Prepositioni. 
 'He is in the province of Shan-tung.' 
 
 111*--? #2 
 
 '%\ province. JJ^, in 
 
 <Up.* 
 « Go f/p the hill.' 
 
 Up 
 
 2^ go. JJJ the hill f> 
 
 ' He is gone up to Peking.' 
 ^>^* has gone. ^f L W ) ?{[£ IIe 
 
 He 
 
 Peking 
 
 
 ' Lift up, or take up.' 
 
 Or, 
 
 3fc~ Mt He 
 
 AM 
 
 Take 
 
 Chi 
 
 Straight 
 
 Take that boiler off the fire, 
 the fire place 
 
 =k;: sfc* ^ ^- -^s. 
 
 C the fire place 7 ^ ' 
 
Of PnEPosiTioss.J CHINESE LANGUAGE. 259 
 
 « Take this thing off the table.' 
 
 >thc table 
 
 ' Over.' 
 \ 
 
 ' He is* gone orer the water.' 
 
 2~ is gone. 7Pj ,he riv " ^S t0 P asl ftfil He 
 
 1 He climbed or<r the wall.' 
 3^ went / jg£ OTC r ^jfj the wall ij^t. climbed f^ 
 
 'Below, under.' 
 * Below the (able.' 
 
 V below. _ S- 
 
 The tabl. 
 
 The pencil is below your foot.' 
 J T - » "^p' The pcocij 
 
 &• , # r 
 
 " below. 
 
 T- 1 W- 
 
A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Prepositions. 
 'The situation of the K wan-poo \sbelow that of the Viceroy.' 
 j2 '»' ^l erlhan \^ «* SH KwBn ) 
 
 frZL Mr* n fat g|^ 
 
 poi 
 
 the Viceroy 
 
 ta 
 
 ,„: 
 
 ■■ -z. 
 
 'Above.' 
 ' The office of the Viceroy is above that of the Kwan-poo.' 
 
 /the Kwan-poo V office >The Viceroy 
 
 m'" ut. ^;r #,? 
 
 ' It is above your head.' 
 
 ting | »*A»/f - '^ ' ***" ifA* "^ ~^~^ ""' H Sht 
 
 vortex. I - * above 7 head I fj* your / \V" situation "Tp Is 
 
 ' The price is above ten thousand tales.' 
 
 ^ and -^ ten thousand ^^ju is '^ *«i 1 
 
 / The pric« 
 .^r more. f^JAJ , ales •• 0Qe A $gj^ 
 
 Or, 
 
 -»'» "j5T yfiHf 
 
 one JJTf fcoouj JJcJ Jita i 
 
 > higher "* K 
 
 ?/ tlio.uand p||Kf * ^^ ' 
 
 The price 
 
 *$£_ 
 
 thau 
 
 Ab ls 
 
Or Prepositions.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 241 
 
 •Under.' 
 <I know that I can buy it under that price." 
 
 -f^T can. SfyL soon *£_ the yg that ^^ I 
 
 _^J buy P* below \^3 price ^RjJ-J know 
 
 'Before.' 
 1 Go before me.' 
 
 ^^ jjfjwl ^fe»e ^XLe tff. 
 
 1 Before the table of a magistrate.' 
 
 %T table P *«*■•) 
 
 I A magistrate* 
 
 £j|] before. /f\f /■>» 
 
 ' Behind.' 
 ' He followed behind.' 
 
 yfj walked. \\{\ and /$£ after |$££, followed yfy He 
 
 'Beyond.' 
 It is beyond that wall.' 
 
 4fc I'i. 
 
 ^f- 7L ont.idc. r|jgj '* 3 
 
 1. 1 
 
A GRAMMAR OF T II B [Of Phepositionj 
 
 * It is now beyond the time appointed.' 
 
 x Nor 
 past ^n 
 
 'Against.' 
 It is against the wall. 
 
 gj Uic wall. >t£ If 
 
 \ against 
 
 ' He was leaning against the posts of the door.' 
 rs 
 
 | | the door " ft??, H 
 
 leaned against 
 
 « He spoke to me against that man.' 
 
 attacking 
 
 
 agfto 
 
 Hint 
 
 
 spoke 
 
Op Pbepositioss] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 243 
 
 ; The Tartars fought against ihe Chinese.' 
 
 
 the Chinese :• The T»rt»r> 
 
 ' Over against.' 
 * JlO'tian is over against the foreign factories.' 
 
 'flf Sctorie. ^Pf «: 
 
 1 
 
 Iliviua 
 
 opposite to. 
 
 A, Itai 
 
 the foreig» 
 
 • Through.' 
 ' Go through that road.' 
 
 HE -J 
 
 that 
 
 tola* 
 walk 
 
 through 
 
 * You can go through.' 
 
 jUl_ tbro««h. 'J vf en ^| J walk JVI , » Yob 
 
 It implies going through, a door, a passage, or any business. 
 h e a 
 
844 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Pkepositions, 
 
 < About.' 
 ' He went all about the market.' 
 
 " walked. > round about \ the market 
 
 It 
 
 - naiacu. \ round about \ the market 
 
 H-* Tfr« 4 #r, 
 
 About so much. 
 
 
 * He spoke to me aJowi that affair. 
 
 
 •fftt He 
 
 J- that 
 yf/f fciVn 7 
 
 |aJ L'Lt. 
 
 spoke 
 
 •Among, amongst.' 
 ' It must be amongst these.' 
 
 l these 
 
 1 XK" 
 
 
 pet 
 must 
 
0» Phepositions.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 245 
 
 • The Emperor is the greatest amongst men.' 
 -7r* ekt -£_, f Ji» 
 
 V the Emperor 
 
 y^. great. *^* U g^ ' 
 
 midst 
 
 ' Between.' 
 1 The pencil is lying between these two ink-stands. 
 
 ' between. > ink-»tand 
 
 ^*"' 
 
 -£'■: 
 
 flU**' 3JH*'" ^.bese 
 
 ban; 
 two 
 
 « Near.' 
 
 2c- 
 
 It is near that chair.' 
 
 fct Ski 
 
 > chair. 
 
 ttal 
 
 situated 
 
 •?l£. near 
 
 ^- > 
 
 cW»j , 
 
2iG A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Pukpositioxs. 
 
 * It is a long; tima since that.' 
 ^ loot- time. ^i» £ll'° Jv that PJ Fro » 
 
 >£j- a goo* >£| now -^ affw /pj b*" 
 
ClilM^SC LANG I 
 
 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 1 Though, although.' 
 ' Though he be sick, he must come.' 
 
 ; >ft the) 
 
 ^^ ninst >^J have 
 
 'A/though I have frequently admonished him, I do not perceive that he has re- 
 formed.' 
 
 *fo£ him %£)) admoniihcd jjjjli Aitbou,!. 
 
 % reform. 
 
 a-' is;:;- 
 
 « 
 
 a; 
 
 linve 
 
 -*j\ not -^> 
 
 Jtr 3k 
 
 limn 
 
 For.' 
 
8*8 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Conjunctions. 
 
 * Jf at that time, that affair had happened, I must have seen it, /or I was then pre- 
 sent.' 
 
 KJXl I 4*3- affair, 
 
 -j^fc. «•*« ^K ** &*-. tnng 
 
 }$JL then ^ I J|| tbat 
 
 ^ " a< XU "* rt •** 
 
 /JJ_ wa» i>^ mnst HvJ* time 
 
 'there. \have»een l 
 
 M J IB*-' ^"» j 
 
 ^ kal _fc ye * 
 
 -JTlt. for /J=J to have 
 
 ^that ^nl . 
 
 happened 
 
 that 
 
 And,' is som^imes made by rfrA jfij ; /ce2 ;*£ ; ^«?a> 3£ ; jptng Jf£. 
 ' He and his brother live in the city.' 
 
 te y 
 
 %" ' Ik. 
 
 T.'I 
 
 /.;,< 
 
 1 ) 
 
 
 mt^ tft- 
 
Of Conjunctions.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 549 
 
 1 He came, and told me.' 
 
 
 > to know. I told 
 
 *g«i »g-j jfc^ 
 
 5£ • fin and 
 
 • 1 want this and that also.' 
 I that. f „ lat 
 
 1 This «>»</ that were made bv him.' 
 
 A^\ 
 
 'h ««. ^ ri c/.?. 
 
 Thli 
 
 J9ri- 3fc5 
 
 > made. 
 
 1 
 
 Yay "tin. also, is used for the conjunction 'and.' The sound of y<\y jftt, 
 the final particle, is commonly used in conversation for 'and.' It is also 
 sometimes written, but it seems improper. 
 
 Id Chinese composition, the conjunction ' and' is sparingly used. 
 
250 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Conjunctions. 
 
 ' If.' 
 Jo j£} ; tang j\!q ; joo %t), as, is often used for ' if.* 
 ' If he accompany me, 1 will go.' 
 
 •3r so- 3S ? - Wi fo "° w sin u 
 
 \ "J «il" then >QXl me -^jj he 
 
 ' Ifyou should have good news, I beg that you will hasten to send a line, to let 
 me know.' 
 
 T3ng 
 
 *£it. -J- character ~% .end ^f beg ^g kel ) iPJ If 
 
 /good news 
 
 7^-1 me) know "a p^ quickly ^J S ^ 
 
 (you) have 
 
 'So.' 
 
 4 If that affair be so, it is well.' 
 
 Ilfj'tuen ^Bj"«^ Jjf- affair ^ If 
 
 • That,' denoting a final end. 
 
Of Co.vjcsctioxs.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 • He studied that he might obtain a public situation.' 
 
 *B nitrates VI ' 1 f© Hc 
 
 V that (he) '. 
 
 A& tl f=§^ s '""~' 
 
 'fvj* might obtain ~£j books 
 'As.' 
 ' Do it as you did before.' 
 
 The same is expressed thus, 
 
 "one fJIJ before l^fX. do 
 
 * ylj he wishes it so, very well.' 
 
 ip £L ^E <* ? ^ t£ *- t^ As (or since) 
 #~ ^> ^- #?« 
 
 In this sentence, 'since' would probably be better than 'as.' 
 4 As you please.' 
 
 ^convenience. ^ >° or ^M Follow 
 
 • As soon as he comes, inform me.' 
 
 551 
 
 F f 3 
 
£52 A GRAMMAR OFTHE [Of Conjunctions. 
 
 ' He must do it as W"1I as he can.' 
 
 act. 
 
 Jjjj and yj s <«ngtb ^(|1 as (,Uis) jj& must 'ftj£ He 
 
 They more generally say, 
 
 •r. «) J. *<•<, »^ Bl ^ f..» exert. V/ P« JJ. ** 
 
 ^P^C do. -^y^ go ani ^/J streogth 3*^ bis-utmost A£± must 'ftSi He 
 
 Which expresses exactly the same sense. 
 
 * You nitty have as much as you please.' 
 
 **J may #££ follow 
 
 ^|\ Not 
 
 /ff hfve ffi ^ ) 
 
 -q Pj restricted 
 
 ( y0 " r 
 
 ' how much 
 
 < Lest.' 
 
 
 Is difficult to render in Chinese. 
 
 
 ' Make haste and finish, lest if not he should be anijry.* 
 
 &i #nr 
 
 j$Z 
 
 £ will be angry. J not 
 
 j^ ha>Un 
 
 rib ■" 
 
 ~—^r a little 
 
 " apprcbend J to finish 
 
 W „ 3 > t£-J 
 
Of Conjunctions.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. Si3 
 
 'Than.' 
 * There is nothing higher than heaven." 
 '^/^ ht»ven. /^ than JfJj uigher . -^R^. No* 
 
 * Because.' 
 ' He is happy because he is good.' 
 
 1 Neither.' 
 
 *"f\ not ^ **** J 
 
 ■ Both.' 
 
 <TJoIeu.' 
 
 la not easily rendered. — 
 
 * He will come soon, unless he Ik» Bick.' 
 
 JfL. fat . ^L ffiV 
 
 7J»/{j *' n «»on /Py wckncM ^|\ not 
 
25* A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Conjunction: 
 
 Or thu3, 
 
 be'(be) Z%\ Pot-i 4uL Hc 
 
 if not so 
 
 jen 
 
 'Notwithstanding.' 
 
 ' Though he was a little sick, he came notwithstanding.' 
 
 yj&r came. 'jfifj thing -j </ȣ[ sickness, ^Ef had jJj$E Thoagli 
 
 j.- 5 "- J,ns #;.i *r«. fat 
 
 <Yet.' 
 
 : There are yet a few.' 
 
 a fc«. 
 
 UwHn 
 Yet 
 
 ' a few. 
 
 <But.' 
 ; They came with me, but they went by themselves.' 
 
 J themselves ' 
 
 5fer •*»■ ■$•£ '* ) |bJ with 
 
 J. tbf y 
 
 Tbcy 
 
Of Conjunctions.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 « I should be glad to do it, but the time is uot suitable.' 
 ' the tiuie 
 
 It is not A -nan, W A-niew. 
 
 \ A-mcw. V\-nan 
 
 \ Not 
 
 * It is not only his duty to do it, but your duty also.' 
 
 jut* " ; Tfr »*» ^h WB nfe yiB? >^ M " ~y 7> 
 
 '^ to Jo it. ^/J^^Uo gJJ bat /^5 duty J/P '» >f\ N 
 
 P=j ought 
 
 Wr- ^"^ #». 4t». 
 
 'Tliis is what he wishes to do, It I it is not my original intention.' 
 
 3g iiueuti.,,.. 52 '»> $s but 'fffc wisu >S u y t ™» 
 
 ^^ original ^f uot "^» to do, -J{f^ Lis Ip. affair 
 
 ' Nor.' 
 'He would neither do this way nor that way.' 
 
 &i jfc'i m-r #:;' fi& ^-• ?riu 
 
 ^:, fat fjci ^- !»*»*/ 
 
25G A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Conjunct 
 
 • Eitlrer, or.' 
 ' It is either Lin-kwan or Haou-kuan, I do not know which.' 
 
 \ Haou-kwan 
 >one. 
 
 £f «M la. *irf 
 
 Lin-kwan 
 
CHINESE LANGUAGE. 257 
 
 OF INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 I. Expressive of grief. 
 
 As 
 
 'Alas! Alas!' 
 In distress, they say 
 
 &<- fft* "FT* 
 
 < I'm to be pitied !' 
 
 gfc... 4^. ^ T — 
 
 ' I'm undone !' 
 
 ^g« ^g« Bf« P-|- 
 
 ♦ Alas, how painful !' 
 
 i£'" T- 
 
 And, 
 
 Alio denote grief and anxiety.— 
 
 Q| 
 
258 A t: RAM MAR OF THE [Of IxrcniEcrioxa. 
 
 2. Of Surprize. 
 
 jHr tsai. /JpiJ m 
 
 'What!' 
 ^ 2J<* \\}&- HT ' s extremely common, though the first of the characters is 
 only found in lighter productions. It is an exclamation that escapes them 
 when they admire, wonder, are distressed or pity, as wellas in the moment 
 of surprize. 
 
 3. Of Admiration. 
 'How excellent!' 
 
 ' O how great !' 
 
 v%<"' 1 f W»* .$c* $h 
 
 ' O how admirable !' 
 
 Ef°uzfcz\%' at Ae end of a sentence, denote admiration. Fo5=fc 
 frequently occurs at the beginning of a sentence, and nearly corresponds 
 to the word ' now' when used as a particle of connection, ' as, now if this 
 be true,' &c. 
 
CHI NESE LANGUAGE. '-09 
 
 OF THE PROVISCIAL DIALECT. 
 
 OF THE CANTON DIALECT. 
 
 That the pronunciation of the character is in the provincial dialect dif- 
 ferent from that of the Kwan dialect, has already appeared in the tahle of 
 syllables. Though that table exhibits the regular difference that subsists 
 between them, there arc yet in the provincial dialect many anamolies not 
 noticed there, and which can be learned only from practice. 
 
 In the Canton dialect, there are words for which they have no character, 
 and there are others, for which the people of the province have formed a 
 character. These Provincial characters arc not admitted into dictionariei 
 of the language. 
 
 The Provincial dialect is called pi htcd ytfj £f ; tod hied jjfi J^, and 
 too 'an 3^ J: ' n contradistinction from the proper and general language of 
 the Empire, called Air an hied ^ *||f, ' public officer's speech or language.' 
 In Europe, it is called, from the Porlugueze, the ' Mandarin tongue.' 
 
 The Chinese define the phrase kwan-hxsd thus, 
 
 hi 
 
 Every 
 
 Jtfj »rr ^I«id(1 pf *'0 ^r| UK <C££ universally "^f 
 
 \ language i , 
 
 -rr Mm * 33b. »*" P ro - =2l *« S -> rhi =?S ** *P* •*** 
 
 -LC •'*"'■ |3 ■onciation fj J f^ the 3^g. throughout -%J province 
 
 «. ft « The proper and general language of the empire.' 
 Ofl 
 
$60 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of the Pkovincial Dialect. 
 
 In the Canton dialect, the names of things are generally the same as in 
 the kwan dialect ,- that is, the character is the same, though they pronounce 
 it differently. With the Pronouns it is not so. 'He' is expressed by 
 A-«e" -fjj. The plural, they form by the word '<e 3 ,' for which they have no 
 character.* ' We,'— ngo $fc te\ ' You,' ni ffi te\ * They,' hue a -j |3 te 1 . 
 
 The Possessive, 'mine,' ngo tilt ft^f J$|, or ngo ffi ka*. ' Ours,' ngo ^ 
 te 1 ka*. The other persons are formed in the same way. 
 
 Demonstrative. ' This,' ni ko fa. » That* ko ko <fg flgf. 
 
 The Interrogative.. ' What ?' mat 1 -Q ; mat* yu\ Jg^ -{£. 'Who?' 
 mat 1 ya* ytin J^ §»^ -[£, or pen 3 ko yun }^ fa |g. It is also said mat> 
 shue* * || -{£. ' Which ? ' pen 3 k6 ya 2 }gf fa ^§, or mat* ya 2 ||f -&. 
 
 For the Verb to be, they generally use hit £^. Thus, 
 'Who is it?' 
 
 /^Sin. Jg^y- Qmafi jfc Hel 
 
 The Adverb 'not,' they render by im ,1 ^, and mow ite f 
 ' Is it or not ?' 
 -$!*«. tig,* ffin<t 
 
 • Every person, however, adopts such a character as he thinks conveys the sound. 
 
 t No person 
 •ffair &c.' mtfio j;ij 
 
 ,' bio'is y a* ^ pfr. < He is not come,' kue* » mow lot *fe Vfc Y£r. 'No business, 
 
Or the Provincial Dialect.] CHINESE LANGOAGE. 261 
 
 'It is not." 
 
 ^ ** **& 
 
 « How ?' is made by «em' yaong* * ^| f A- * Thus/ by kum* yaong* " 
 ^ oft. « Where ?' pen' cA'i ^ ^. 
 
 The word 'thing,' they express by ya 2 fgf. ' A good thing," Aw j/a 1 
 %f1$. 'A bad thing/ iw Aow J .ya 2 g^. $jp ^p. 
 
 ' To bring,' they express by nmg ht<%* $& ; kai hi ^; fef ^ $g. 
 « To take/ Id 3$. • To take away/ «mg Aue 1 2 ^ $£ ; Aai hue* * ^ ; 
 lo hue 11 ^ JJI- 'To eat/ ,ya/c'; yak 1 fan. jfc 
 
 An interrogation is often made by hti ma RB| ^, ' is it, or not ?' and also 
 by nS afc. 
 
 The above are the provincial characters which most frequently occur. 
 We shall add a few sentences, taken from the preceding part of the work, 
 and now render them according to the Canton dialect, by which the differ- 
 ence between it and the Mandarin tongue will be readily seen. 
 
 Sentences which occur under the Pronouns, page 87. 
 
 ' I do not know.' 
 ^.*, ;&!,».. »*'• $&*,, 
 
2t>2 A GRAMMAR OF T H E [Of the Provincial Lh.. 
 
 ' Havcyou the key of my study?' 
 
 j|| chi /^ Ac ^ rf P^ m Q n ^ .hi 
 
 ' I'll thank you to pass the ink to me.' 
 -f^„; 3^*„. }«fw, |^r.», 
 
 &*. ^;- &'i fp" 
 
 ' You do not love me as he does.' 
 
 yfg**.. $u *?§•«- ^ Jt« #* 
 
 ' My meaning is this.' 
 ^ S0 ^. R^m ^W @* ||« ka $fc* S > 
 
 ' This sentence is what he himself pronounced.' 
 
 to. Jj*Jf »A3 ||| <5l / ^ W "*** 
 
 ' He loves his son.' 
 
 A^tseh ka JJ^hi B t.t J^ ' / f|5 K « ,a 
 
 'What affair." 
 
Or TiiE Provincial Dialict.] CHINESE I. V N Q L A G E. '263 
 
 ' What person is it V 
 
 1 This character.' 
 
 < That dog.' 
 
 'These tea cups.' 
 
 ' Those umbrellas.' 
 
 #•*• W* fEi* H» ^« 
 
 * The thing which I wanted.' 
 
 m-- - ** jgfr- »*» 
 
 Or 
 
 if,... - 5f,.< #f..» $.» 
 
 « Neither.' 
 >^W. «&.« -f|RJw ^Lrtv 
 
 'Such a man ai this.* 
 
£C4 A GRAMMAR OF TH E [Of the Provincial Dialect. 
 
 Sentences which occur under the Adjectives, page 68. 
 • He is wicked.' 
 
 'This rice is good.' 
 
 u. ffiht* ^*« ^ mci Jjsfcy"' 5^ w 
 
 « This is better than that.' 
 
 i%™ jlH* ^*-» jcf* to 10 w 5S w 
 
 ' Whether is this or that the better ?' 
 
 'The sooner the better.' 
 j£fki*. $$y« _^..a* ;gg™ 
 
 ' Greater than the whole.' 
 -jig ^4^. . 9U ^J fcttJj -^- „ 
 
 'The best wine.' . 
 ^jfcj fete, fca ||m» J^**** ^.T«J 
 
Of the Pbovikcial Dialect.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. £65 
 
 • He performs the best work — you should employ him.' 
 
 /fjgf*««« yji* Wr** ZLZ **■* ^f ii *s \~>i«h*g /fEfK««* 
 
 ffihir. ^t«* "Pj*» ^^ ** '■" 'fe"''* 
 
 Sentences xchich occur under the Verbs, pages 114, <$e. 
 ' 1 have a book.' 
 
 «W 
 
 ' You have a great deal of cotton.' 
 
 What have vou to sell?' 
 
 g^. ^.ai j£ fi Jg^, a . Q mtt » ^f, 4 . ^Jt 
 
 'Had you before?' 
 rf^a. I^f^ ;££*. jffixi 
 
 ' No, he had not?' 
 ' I shall have-' 
 To-morrow/ they often express bj 
 
266 A GRAMMAR OF TH £ [Of the Pkotincial Dialect. 
 
 1 Will he have to-morrow ?' 
 
 fj^mi. ^^ ?pj ytw T^ftriV J« ^ mine ,f|5 Ku* 
 
 ( I am an old man V 
 
 A^- ^t ]iw #* rf i£^ 
 
 * This is mine V 
 *' ^^ j^M i%*< » 
 
 ' They were once at Peking.' 
 
 * I will be careful.' 
 
 id:*- ih-> ^«*» ijt^ 7(f "^ g&^ 
 
 ' Let him be there.' 
 J||c'" ^ft" * yj£'^ /fgfc«," f^ 7 '"' 
 
 ' If he be there call him.' 
 
 3^«- W\~ M j$ kS ^ kui „ 
 
 1 How old are you.' 
 - * ^y ' --^* '4*4t ^£»» 
 
Of the Provincial Dialect.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. 2G» 
 
 4 That work is done.' 
 
 ' Did he come yesterday V 
 
 ^ W *%»• i&« ^* H - fe*> >fE«" 
 
 The syllable /# ends almost every sentence — it is a mere expletive. ' Yes* 
 is expressed by hei ^ Id. The syllable n6 tyj£, often terminates interroga- 
 tive sentences. 
 
 <How.'' 
 
96S A GRAMMAR OF THE 
 
 OF SYNTAX. 
 
 As the adjective inChinesehas not, strictly speaking, though we use the 
 terms, any distinction of gender, number or case, it necessarily agrees with 
 the substantive; again, as the verb is the same in every person, in both 
 numbers, it always agrees with its nominative ; and finally, as the form of the 
 noun is not altered by the influence of the verb, there is no place either for 
 Concord or Government, which two generally constitute the most material 
 parts of the syntax of a language. 
 
 A few remarks on the right order of words in a sentence is all that can 
 be included in the Syntax of a grammar of the Chinese language. 
 
 I. A noun in the nominative case follows that connected with it in the 
 possessive, as, ' This man's son.' 
 
 \ son. I This 
 
 ^•J £? feu i 
 
 'His Excellency the Viceroy of Canton and Iczsang-si. 1 
 
 y his excellency. ' Viceroy 
 
 kwani'i 
 
OfStwtax.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. S69 
 
 2. After the name of office follows the person's name filling that office. 
 Thus, 
 
 R» 3 
 
 Sk6*> 
 
 Shua-te 
 
 Chow-tsee-he. III 
 
 Hit* 
 
 Hecn, 
 
 i. e. * Chow-tsee-he, the Ileen of Shun-te.' 
 
 $£™ !p^"*» llf*"" ^gjf*** 
 
 i. e. ' Pung, the /fan of Heang-shan. 1 
 
 Ileen is at once the appellation of a district of a certain ex tent, and the 
 • ppellation of the officer or chief magistrate of the district. 
 
 3. The time of an action, precedes the verb expressing that action. As, 
 
 } 
 
 to-morrow 
 til* 
 
 He will come to-niorrow. 
 
 4. In dates, the year precedes the month, and the month the day. Thus— 
 'A Petition of tin- first day, of the second moon of the 16th year of Kea- 
 ting,' rendered into Chinese is inverted. As, 
 
?70 
 
 A GRAMMAR OFTHE [Of Stntax. 
 
 pJ „ . & rk =g Ka 
 
 >jr petition. 'second *TO l Kn . kiag 
 
 + -, 
 
 J first il«l> 
 
 B t # 
 
 jreai 
 
 5. Adjectives generally precede the noun. As 
 ■ 1 1 $ha " Tel Kaoa 
 
 ) I) hill. fpj High 
 
 « A high hill.' 
 
 4 A good man/ 
 Sometimes they may either precede or follow the noun. As, 
 
 \ Country 
 y^C large. S7 *** 
 
 Or 
 
 ■»- v #£ 
 
 v country. 
 
 'A very extensive country.' 
 
Of Svmtax/J CHINESE LANGUAGE. 871 
 
 6. When a particular emphasis is laid on the adjective, it follows the 
 noun ; also when it is accompanied by an adverb. As, 
 
 Affair 
 
 An important affair.' 
 
 fr' 
 
 Thii 
 
 'cxircnulv. 
 
 • This is an affair extremely base.' 
 
 7. The adjective is sometimes separated from the noun by the verb 
 coming between. As, 
 
 IS***") /t Great* 
 
 \ conscqiu m-i ... 
 
 ' Jt hits important consequences.' - 
 
 8. J o6 ^Hf, at the beginning of a sentence, is understood to apply to 
 every succeeding member, unless there be some turn in the expression. As, 
 
 -b^ttoy — nr*j** say -gr*j*» J„* *'» J 
 
 ^|2|it ^f\..ot a ^J\ n ot VK? No 
 
 -£* # p.l ktU —l-*flng prt «•*« fcfe> *»8 
 
 ^! >£ «c y/ garter jj.jjl.car; y^gt place 
 
 i. r. ' There is no place where it is not heard, no quarter in which it in not Men.' 
 
872 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Syntax. 
 
 The preface to the Dictionary of Kang-he says, that it was the Empe- 
 ror's wish, that that work should be so perfect, that, 
 
 £f£. ! ^T % not fc=J sound p^ explained j( \. which -JJJk No 
 
 I j^. which * a V*|\ 
 
 I/HI prepared JT _ which ' * a «^\ not =Jj^ meaning 
 
 I. e. « There should be no sense, (of the character which was) not fully explained ; 
 no pronunciation which was not given.' 
 
 9. Two negatives make a strong affirmative. As, 
 
 v 
 
 That 
 
 chuin 
 
 J- ruined. 
 
 tttttnot 
 
 -y poo 
 
 ^|\ not 
 
 That vessel must inevitably be lost.' 
 
 ^fTknow ^\'nTt ^not «f^ 1 
 
 ' You cannot but know, or — you know it fully. 
 
 ftfL.TfiZ #-' :*s #?: 
 
 ' You cannot but know, or — you must know.' 
 
CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 OF PROSODY. 
 
 The Chinese language, from its being composed of monosyllables, when 
 spoken gives a rather harsh and broken sound. There is a good deal of 
 tone in the pronunciation of the natives. In the Tartar pronunciation 
 of the language, however, there is less tone, and perhaps from its being the 
 Court dialect it is very generally imitated. In reading the Classical books 
 they delight in a musical pronunciation, like recitative. 
 
 For an account of what are commonly called the tones, and which are 
 the accent and quantity of the Chinese language, see page 19. 
 
 The poetry of the Chinese is generally in rhyme. In the present day, 
 however, they pay particular attention to the arrangement of the tones, or 
 to the accent and quantity of each line. 
 
 A Chinese writer in his preface to a collection of poems, compares the 
 progress of poetry in China, to the gradual growth of a tree. The cele- 
 brated Shi-king j^g f^F, he compares to the roots ; when Soo-led) flourished, 
 the buds appeared ; in the time of Keen-ngan,W there were abundance of 
 leaves, but during the dynasty Tang,W many reposed under the shade of this 
 
 (1) ft. U 4£: §g. (,) K«n ngan j£ jg. (3) Tang /£ . 
 li 
 
fft A G li A M M A II O P THE [Of Pnosoov. 
 
 tree, and there were rich supplies of flowers and fruit The She king' 
 fgg =^f. contains about three hundred ancient odes selected by Confucius. 
 Of the three thousand from which he took them, many were immoral, and 
 unworthy of being preserved. About 1500 years ago, Choo-foo-lseeW revis- 
 ed and published them with a collection of the best commentators. The 
 She- fang is divided into three parts called fung ^ ; yd ffi ; and sung g£i. 
 The first contains odes on the common occurrences of life; the second has 
 a reference to government, and the third contains Eulogies. The senten- 
 ces or lines generally consist of four characters. The Chinese often ar- 
 range the lines by the side of each other, but not always : they sometimes 
 merely point them off; in that case you cannot tell, by the appearance of the 
 page, whether it contains poetry or not. 
 
 The most regular compositions arc called she, and always now contain 
 either five or seven words in each line. They express them by, woo yin 
 * hs > fi# If JL : and, t$i yen shB jf^f- f| -fc. 
 
 Odes containing five words in each line have four,jeight, or sixteen lines 
 to a verse. Those which contain seven words in each line, have four or 
 eight lines to a verse. The second, fourth, sixth, and eighth lines should 
 rhyme. They frequently make the first also rhyme with the others. The 
 Rhyihmus they call t&ngyun^ fffj,and denominate the verse by the number 
 of words which rhyme. Thus they say, Woo yea pa yun f|g /\, =f 2£. 
 
OtPuo?ody.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. £73 
 
 i. e. a verse containing five characters in each line, and sixteen lines : for 
 every other line ends with the same sound. The difference between jung- 
 shing |j* 2£, and tsc-shmg %j~ J^, has been already explained at page 19. 
 
 If there be five words in a line, and the second word be ptng-shing, it is 
 required that the fourth be Ist-shing; and vice versa, if the second be ping- 
 shing,1he fourth shall be tsZ-shing. It is also required, that the second and 
 fourth characters of every pair of lines, shall be in the oneJine ping-shing 
 and in the other tse-shing. 
 
 Similar rules are observed in those verses which contain seven charac- 
 ters in each line. In these it is required, that the second, fourth, and sixth 
 words in each line should be varied. 
 
 Another species of poem more irregular than the she, and generally ex- 
 tended to a greater length, is denominated fod ^. Beside these, there are 
 small pieces which are intended to be sung, and which are called led $ft ; 
 ked, {ftf ; and tse't'gft, or, tse'e |m|. "Without extensive knowledge of their 
 ancient history, and the customs and manners of the country, it is very diffi- 
 cult to understand their poetical compositions. The very point and beauty 
 of the piece often depends on some slight allusion which a foreigner does 
 not perceive. Added to that, the style is peculiarly concise, and unusual 
 words are introduced. 
 
276 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Prosody. 
 
 A Specimen of that species of ode called She, containing seven words in each sentence, 
 and eight lines in all. 
 
 m & &t w a x '-^'"'m 
 a m & » wi # ft* ■<* * 
 
 £ & # EH A * * 36 
 
 « *r As £ ^ *u a » 
 *. «f ^ ft » J? W. ^ 
 
 (D* 
 To a Friend. 
 
 " Through much disease, I rarely take my book from the shelf; 
 
 " I hold an office, but am without ability — my spirits are broken. 
 
 "When the queen (2) of birds from the interstices of the mountains appeared, and 
 
 times were prosperous, we easily met, 
 " But since the man who is a prodigy parted from me, how difficult to see him. 
 " In playing on the kin, drinking in the breeze, or beneath the shining moon, I 
 
 spend my life, 
 " (But my friend valuable as) the gold and the gem remains, like the trees Sung 
 
 and hiun, unhurt by the rigours of winter. 
 " Ere long I shall return to my obscure village, and by the side of the stream 
 
 spread my net ; 
 " There again 1 shall fish over against the Id flower, and the stones of the brook.". 
 
 (1) In M. -S. tlic words which rhyme are often marked with a double period as above. (2) A fabul- 
 ous bird, said to be sceu when eminently great men appear. 
 
Op Prosody.] . CHINESE LANGUAGE. S77 
 
 An Ode (She) containing seven words in each sentence, andfour lines in a verst. 
 * 1* A «fc 3*^^& 
 
 f) 
 
 a 
 
 # 
 
 II 
 
 # 
 
 m 
 
 +B 
 
 * 
 
 *t 
 
 pi 
 
 -B 
 
 # 
 
 flr 
 
 * 
 
 IR 
 
 ffc 
 
 ft 
 
 51 
 
 & 
 
 m 
 
 H 
 
 IRs 
 
 * 
 
 pi 
 
 3?S 
 
 ^e 
 
 IK 
 
 W 
 
 % 
 
 & 
 
 
 RR 
 
 * 
 
 * 
 
 Mi 
 
 
 * 
 
 3r 
 
 *r 
 
 * 
 
 
 JJ 
 
 $ 
 
 At 
 
 * 
 
 
 Bl & Wt £ 
 
 On remembering my Father. 
 
 (" The trees of Woo are entirely separated from the clouds of Yew, 
 (So is our correspondence entirely broken off, 
 Extremely remote are the two countries ; I am anxious how to act. 
 My spirit in dreams cares not for the distance. 
 
 1 have often mounted on the wind, and gone to inquire when he arose, and where 
 he dwelt : 
 
 1 desire to return but cannot; 1 mourn in poverty. 
 
 My children, boys and girls, think of me with many tears, 
 
 1 am distressed, when 1 remember my parents, and their hoary locks, 
 
 Morning after morning, leaning on their staff, and against the posU of the gate, 
 thc-y anxiously look for my return." 
 
J76 A GRAMMAR OF THE [Of Puosodt. 
 
 Specimen of what are called Tsee ' 
 
 * m <* a 
 
 m w # h 
 
 it * m a 
 
 ^ « ^ & 
 
 M M Mi 3$ 
 
 An Adieu to Spring. 
 '■' Day after day man advances to vacant old age; 
 But year after year the spring returns. 
 Let us rejoice together, aud take a bottle.(i) 
 It is in vain to regret the flowers that are fled." 
 (l) Sober ai tbc Cliincie appear to be, many of their lighter productions are btcchanaHau. 
 
0rrac?8»r.] CHINESE LANGUAGE. f79 
 
 Specimen of skat are called Ken [$ 
 
 ft * *fc 
 
 JR # + *I 
 
 ± * # & A g, j: m 
 
 * 4 ^C * * -ii » 
 
 28 2£ # 
 
 dfe ^ JB» 
 
 if KeangNanKeu. 
 *To the midst of the branches, and the surface of the water, spring has returned. 
 The long rows of willows brush the earth ; the peach flowers fly in the wind. 
 The gentle breeze blows on man ; the light of the setting sun shines on his garments. 
 
 It illumines his garments, 
 
 It glows as the evening advances. 
 
 Draw out the yellow gold; (prepare a repast), 
 
 Detain our worthy guest." 
 
280 A GRAMMAR OF THE CHINESE LANGUAGE. 
 
 With the exception of a few sentences taken from books, the preceding phra«-ps 
 depend for their accuracy on the authority of a native of good parts, and who 
 has taught the language to his own countrymen for twenty years. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
 ^ OF THE ^r 
 
 I UNIVERSITY J 
 
 A 1 " 
 
14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 71,15 » the date to which renewed- 
 
 Renewed books are subject to .mmed.ate recall. 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of Californii 
 
 Berkeley 
 
^rmfw